RCA Television Camera Equipment
T E L E V
I
S
I
O N
CAM ERA
E
Q U
I
P M
E N T
(FIFTH EDITION)
TV CAMERAS
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
CAMERA LENSES
CAMERA MOUNTS
MOBILE UNITS
TELEVISION
CAMERA
EQUIPMENT
CATALOG
Page
TV Cameras
Camera Lenses
(Fifth Edition)
PRICE
$1.00
Camera Mounts
Camera Accessories
Lighting Equipment
Mobile Units
Index
RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA
Copyright IW,3. Raffia Corporation a/ America. Broadcast
t
n,.
Proda,,. bi,l.ian.
I
amd.,n
\. !.
Tmk's,
H
ABOUT
THIS
CATALOG
This catalog provides information on RCA TV Camera equipment for television studio
and closed circuit use. Other RCA Broadcast Equipment Catalogs supply information
on film, TV tape, terminal, microwave and audio equipment; also on AM, FM and TV
transmitters, antennas, and transmission line equipment.
The information contained in this catalog is intended to serve as a buying guide for
the user. Complete specifications and ordering information are supplied. Readers who
desire more information or individual bulletins on particular equipment items are invited
to write to their RCA Broadcast Representative.
OTHER RCA TECHNICAL PRODUCTS
also manufactures many other electronic products, including: two -way radio
and microwave relay communications equipment; optical and magnetic film recording
equipment; sound systems of all types; 16mm projectors and magnetic recorders;
industrial inspection and automation equipment; scientific instruments, such as the
electron microscope; closed -circuit television systems; and many types of custom built equipment for industry, the military, educational and medical services. Information
describing these products may be obtained from RCA Sales Offices in the United States
and Canada. International customers should contact local RCA distributors or RCA
International Division, Clark, N. J.
RCA
PRICES
Domestic prices of the equipment shown in this catalog are provided in a separate
price list. Prices are listed in the order in which they are shown in the catalog. To
determine the price of any equipment first note the page on which it is shown in the
catalog, then consult the price list in accordance with this page number. Equipments
are identified by type and MI (Master Item) numbers which are used to identify
apparatus on invoices and packing slips. International prices for the various equipment
items shown in this catalog are available from your local RCA distributors or RCA
International Division, Clark, N. J.
HOW TO ORDER
The RCA Broadcast Camera Equipment shown in this catalog is sold directly through
familiar with broadcast equipment and related
problems. These RCA Representatives are located in convenient offices. Domestic orders
for equipment shown in this catalog, or requests for additional information, should be
directed to the nearest RCA Sales Office. International Readers are invited to contact
their local RCA distributor or the RCA International Division, Clark, N. J.
RCA Broadcast Representatives, who are
CAhFRAS
41-inch Image Orthicon TV Camera
TYPE TK -60A
FEATURES
4' z -inch image orthicon for sharper, crisper
monochrome pictures
Built -in remote iris control with
transistorized servo amplifier system
Compact control panel with simplified
operating controls
8 -inch
camera chains easily controlled by
one operator
Built -in electronic lens cap
Six
Rapid
stabilization- produces picture
within one minute of cold start
-
Counter -balanced yoke assembly
maintains camera balance while focusing
viewfinder kinescope for large,
bright picture
Performance unaffected by line voltage
variation from 95 to 130 volts or
190 to 260 volts
Uses standard television camera cable
CAMERAS
The complete TK -60A Studio Camera Chain
processor,
power supply,
master
monitor,
including camera, set of lenses, camera
control panel and console housing.
DESCRIPTION
The RCA TK -60A Studio and Field Cameras are all new
live monochrome camera chains featuring major advances
in operational simplicity, stability and performance. The
basic camera, which is identical in both the studio and
field equipments, utilizes a 4' 2 -inch image orthicon tube
which provides a substantial improvement in resolution,
signal -to -noise ratio and gray scale reproduction. These
qualities result in pictures having the faithfulness of detail and general high quality normally associated with
fine photography.
Extensive use is made of stabilized circuitry in every part
of the camera chain, beginning with the voltages applied
to the image orthicon and extend through all of the video
amplifiers, deflection circuits and processing circuits. As a
result, a great improvement has been achieved in stability
of operation, which has permitted in turn a major reduction in the number of operating controls and the amount
of effort required for operation. In addition, the frequency
with which readjustments of setup controls must be made
and the amount of servicing required are minimized.
All of the basic setup controls are found in the camera.
Once these setup controls and voltages are adjusted they
need no further attention in normal day -to -day operation.
Cameras may be interchanged freely between camera
controls without change of setup adjustments. The simplicity
of the operating controls together with the inherent stability
of the camera chain makes it possible for one video operator to handle several camera chains simultaneously.
The major units of the TK -60A Comera Chain consists of
a
combined camera -viewfinder, a processor, a type WP-
16B Power Supply, a TM -6C master monitor, and a remote
control panel. The camera chain is supplied complete
with tubes including image orthicon, a set of three lenses,
a 50 -foot camera cable with connectors, a camera wedge
CAfvRAS
mount and a 13 -inch console housing for the master monitor and remote control panel. The processor and power
supply are designed for mounting in a standard cabinet
rack. A Cradle Head and one of the available tripods or
pedestals should be ordered to support the camera.
Camera -Viewfinder
The camera and viewfinder in the TK -60A are combined in
a single unit. The streamlined styling of the new housing
with its keystone motif and new sage-gray coloring give
it distinctive, pleasing and extremely functional appearance. All circuit functions within the camera have been
segregated into three subchassis units and a setup control
panel. The sub -chassis units consist of a video preamplifier, a deflection chassis and an auxiliary chassis.
be connected locally to the output of the camera preamplifier to provide a quality check on the video signal as it
leaves the camera.
Ease of Focusing
A unique arrangement has been provided to counterbalance the weight of the image orthicon focus and deflection
coil assembly as it is moved backward and forward during
optical focusing of the camera. As the camera is focused,
this assembly is counterbalanced by the camera auxiliary
subchassis which moves in a direction opposite to that of
the coil assembly. In this way, the work required to move
the focus mechanism is always minimum regardless of the
angle -of -tilt of the camera. Furthermore, there is no tendency for the coil assembly to "slide down hill" when the
camera is tilted.
Access to the inside of the camera is provided by two
hinged side doors which open downward, forming con-
venient horizontal working surfaces during maintenance
periods or are easily removed if desired. The video preamplifier is located in the lower lefthand side of the camera. The deflection and auxiliary chassis are mounted in
opposite sides of the camera by means of swing -out hinges
which permit them to be raised for access to other parts
of the camera assembly and for servicing. A control panel
containing the camera setup controls is mounted toward
the rear of the camera in the lower left side. The image
orthicon and coil assembly are located on a movable focus
carriage at the bottom of the camera.
Cool air is drawn in through ventilating holes in the bottom of the camera, circulated throughout the case and
exhausted by a very quiet "whisper" type fan mounted
in the top of the camera case. A separate blower is used
to maintain proper image orthicon operating temperature.
In addition, a small blower is mounted in the high voltage
compartment to cool the associated components.
Large, Bright Viewfinder
The viewfinder of the TK -60A features an
81/2 -inch
rec-
tangular kinescope which produces a large, bright picture
display. Maximum usable highlight brightness is at least
150 foot -lamberts with a resolution capability of 600 lines.
The viewfinder is normally fed by a signal from the output of the processor, permitting the cameraman to see a
picture identical to that delivered to the studio output.
This signal is sent over the camera cable and is equalized
for flat response to the same degree as the output signal
delivered by the camera. Provision is made to select remotely from the camera position an alternative signal feed
through the camera cable. This feed may be used to show
the cameraman a composite picture from an effects system
when the camera is being used as an input source for
special effects. In addition, the input of the viewfinder may
viewfinder are combined in a single unit, styled for
pleasing appearance and simplicity. Large 81/2-inch viewfinder produces unusually bright picture with high definition.
Camera and
CAMERAS
ing for heavy telephoto and zoom lenses. The turret shaft
projects through the length of the camera and terminates
in a handle at the rear, permitting change of turret position by a simple, direct rotating motion of the handle.
Accurate, quiet- operating turret indexing is assured by four
rollers which simultaneously engage notches in the rear
of the turret itself.
A new precision quick -change lens mount allows replacement of individual lenses by means of two captive mounting screws requiring only one -half turn to secure or to free
the lens. The lens mount is designed to accommodate the
Ml -26882 series lenses which include mechanical provisions
for linear, remote controlled iris adjustment.
Quick change lens mount permits insertion or removal of lens by
merely turning two captive thumbscrews.
Transistor Amplifier Intercom System
Each TK -60A Camera Chain includes a self -contained intercom system with its own power supply. Two separate intercom circuits are provided. One circuit is for production
use and has an outlet at the camera that is terminated in
the processor from which connections may be made to
existing station production intercom circuits. The second
circuit is utilized by engineering. This circuit has outlets in
the camera, processor and remote control panel and may
be operated independently from a built -in d -c power
source in the camera or connected to the existing station
engineering intercom system. An outstanding feature is
the provision of a built -in transistor amplifier and volume
control at each point where a headset is plugged into the
system. This provides a liberal reserve of iriercom level at
all times and permits each user to adjust the level to suit
his own needs. Each station on the intercom system has
back -loading to permit the bridging of a large number of
stations without affecting sound lêvel.
Large, Sturdy Lens Turret
The rugged, large diameter lens turret of the TK -60A cam-
era provides mounting facilities for four lenses with remote
iris control. The 113/4-inch diameter turret provides liberal
spacing between adjacent lenses, thus reducing optical
interference. Rigid mechanical support and accurate optical alignment of the lenses are assured by rim support
bearings at the edge of the turret, providing a solid mount-
Mechanical drive for remote control of iris adjustment is
provided by an enclosed precision servo mechanism
located at the center of the turret. A single gear engages
the iris drive rings of the four lenses permitting simultaneous iris adjustment of all lenses mounted in the turret. The
servo motor may be controlled either locally from the rear
of the camera or remotely from the camera remote control panel. A slip -clutch guards against the possibility of
damage to the lenses or drive mechanism due to jamming,
and permits hand operation of iris adjustment at the front
of the camera when desired. The iris drive mechanism is
easily removable from the turret by loosening two thumbscrews, permitting detachment of the turret by simply
removing a center nut.
Neutral Density Filter Holder
Immediately behind the lens turret is a disc containing six
openings for the insertion of neutral density filters, any
one of which may be introduced into the light path to
compensate for major variations in light level. Selection
Easily removable lens turret provides access to filter holder wheel
with space for six neutral density filters. Holder wheel is rotated by
knob from operator's end of camera. Detent stops between filters
provide convenient optical lens cap.
CAMERAS
The TK-60A Camera
literally turns "inside-out" for complete access to all parts
of filters is provided by a control knob at the rear of the
camera which rotates the disc to the desired position.
Detent stops located between filter positions permit use of
the disc as an optical lens cap.
Easy -To- Service Features
Many electrical and mechanical features are found in the
TK -60A to facilitate servicing. The inherent stability and
reliability of the circuits minimize the servicing required.
When routine checking and repair are needed, a number
of self- testing circuits make the job easy. All significant
circuits are wired to pin jacks for making either meter or
oscilloscope measurements of signal and power supply
voltages.
stabilized circuits employing feedback and current
stabilization, many of the normal tests for tubes and circuit
performance do not give significant indications. However,
an effective test of such circuits can be made by an
arbitrary reduction of filament voltage. In the TK -60
camera, means are provided for applying this reduced
voltage test to one segment of the system at a time. Thus
it is possible to obtain an indication of potential trouble
and to isolate it to a particular area. Test switches are
included in both the camera and processor for applying
this type of test in a routine manner.
In
.
Accessibility to Image Orthicon Tube
The focus- deflection coil assembly swings out to one side
for easy replacement of the image orthicon tube. This
simple approach avoids the need for removal
or of any subassembly within the camera
change the pickup tube, and reduces tube
time to a period of two or three minutes.
of the turret
in order to
replacement
The hinged
Compact pre -set control panel combines camera set-up controls and
numerous test probe points for easy servicing. Sturdy side doors
provide convenient work space for test instruments.
mounting of the two largest chassis subassemblies in the
camera provides accessibility to other areas in the camera. These subassemblies are operable in either normal
or swing -out positions.
Solid type terminal strips with solder connections are used
throughout the camera chain except on sub -assemblies
which may occasionally require removal. Connections to
removable sub -assemblies are made by captive plugs and
receptacles to permit easy removal for servicing or replacement.
41/2 -Inch
Image Orthicon Tube
The heart cf the TK -60A Camera is the RCA
41/2 -inch Image
Orthicon, a newly designed tube made to the same high
precision standards as color pickup tubes. It feature:, the
use of a wall -mesh and high quality dynode construction
which assure uniform beam landing and freedom from
shading and background non -uniformities of all kinds.
Close tolerances held on electrical characteristics of the
41/2 -inch tube are a feature of special importance which
permits the use of setup controls with restricted ranges
in the TK -60A.
The 41/2 -inch tube operates on the same basic principles
as the well known 3 -inch types. In appearance it has the
same general shape, but is simply larger in size. The sig-
nificant difference from the 3 -inch tubes lies in the larger
area of the glass target scanned by the electron beam.
It is this larger area which accounts for the ability to give
increased resolution, or more significantly, the signal to
noise ratio is increased by a factor of almost 2 to 1.
Though the target of the 41/2-inch image orthicon is larger,
the photo -cathode (used diameter) is the same as that of
the 3 -inch tube. Hence camera lenses having the same
size image diagonal may be used with either 41/2- or
3 -inch tubes. Magnification of the electron image in the
Swing -out yoke mounting arrangement permits change of I.O. tube
within two or three minutes.
-inch tube is brought about by suitable strengthening
and shaping of the magnetic focusing field in the image
section of the tube.
41/2
Another important feature built into the 41/2-inch tube
is relatively close spacing between the glass target and
the mesh. As a result, signal -to -noise ratio is increased and
the linear portion of the transfer characteristic is lengthened, permitting more accurate reproduction of the gray
scale. Also, broad redistribution of secondary electrons
is reduced, thus minimizing the possibility of overshoots
and halos in the picture.
High Voltage and Focus Current Regulation
Key to superior picture quality in the TK -60A Camera is the 41/2 -inch
image orthicon tube. While target area is twice as large for higher
resolution, image magnification permits use of same size lenses as are
used with 3 -inch tubes.
Close regulation of the voltages applied to the image
orthicon and viewfinder is of prime importance in achieving
stable performance. This is accomplished by using corona discharge tubes to maintain highly accurate voltages. In
circuits where desirable to eliminate the possibility of
even small variations of the voltages, the corona -discharge
tubes are enclosed in a temperature -controlled oven.
In addition to precise voltage regulation for the image
orthicon, the magnetic focusing field must be equally
stable. Current regulating circuits are employed in the
processing amplifier to maintain the focus current within
a maximum variation of 0.12 percent. Current reference
is obtained from the drop in a resistor having a low temperature coefficient, and voltage reference is obtained
from a highly stable zener diode.
CAME"AS
Stabilization Techniques
With normally -used fixed bias controls, the beam current
in the image orthcion drifts through a rather large range
during the first half hour or so of operation. To eliminate
the need for constant resetting of this bias during warm up, beam current stabilization is provided in the TK -60A
by the use of feedback between G2 and G1 of the image
orthicon tube. This arrangement keeps the beam at the
proper value for discharge of picture -whites and for minimum noise at all times.
A separate blower system is provided for temperature
stabilization of the image orthicon, consisting of a blower
and a plenum chamber with two exhaust ducts. One duct
maintains adequate cooling to the heater and cathode
section, the other directs air to the image section of the
image orthicon tube. The duct to the image section contains two heater elements, which are controlled by a
thermostat mounted in the yoke assembly and in contact
with the glass envelope near the target. The thermostat
and heaters provide rapid warmup and maintain proper
operating temperature of the image section of the image
orthicon tube. Two flexible hoses are utilized as air passages from plenum chamber to the yoke assembly.
Current stabilization is used in amplifier tube circuits
essentially throughout the TK -60A chain. Both temperature
and aging effects which tend to cause a slump in cathode
current are effectively counteracted where desirable by
using a cathode resistor of high value with the grid returned to a positive voltage. Any change in emission
characteristics of the tube will therefore result in only a
small effective change in cathode current. Maximum use
is made of feedback techniques in video output stages,
deflection systems, and clamp circuits. Precision resistors
with very low temperature coefficients are used in all
critical circuits to minimize drift in voltage and current
and to reduce camera warmup time. These are further
aids in maintainng stable signal levels, linearity, and low
differential gain.
Magnetic Shielding
Special care has been employed in the design of the
TK -60A deflection assembly to provide complete magnetic
shielding around the tube and its associated coils. This
makes it possible to operate the camera in stray fields of
intensities as high as 10 gauss without significant deterioration in picture quality.
Premium tubes with high performance and long life are
used wherever possible. Every effort has been made to
minimize the number of tube types and to operate them
conservatively. Use of these tubes along with feedback
and current stabilization yields a great increase in life
All operating controls required by cameraman are located at the rear
of the camera for ease of operation.
expectancy and general reliability. Extensive use is also
made of the new, very small, Nuvistor triode tube. It is
used exclusively in the video preamplifier, and in a number of other functions associated with blanking and deflection. One of the most significant characteristics of the
Nuvistor (especially important to the video preamplifier)
is freedom from microphonics. Other desirable characteristics include very small size, very low heat dissipation,
high gain, and long life.
Built -in Calibration Pulse
A control for adjusting gain of the signal multiplier in the
image orthicon is included among the setup controls in the
camera. A built -in calibration signal is provided for making
proper preset adjustment of this control. The calibration
signal consisting of a symmetrical square wave at scanning line frequency, is added by a switch to the picture
signal ct the input of the video preamplifier. The calibration signal is factory- adjusted to provide the normal level
of 0.7 volts peak -to -peak at the output of the preamplifier. It presents a half -black, half -white picture on the
viewfinder. By using the filter holder disc as a half mask
and focusing the camera on an all -white scene it is seen
that the white portion of the image orthicon signal fills in
the black area left by the calibration signal.
When the gain of the signal multiplier is correct, both
halves of the scene will appear to have equal white values
CAMERAS
on the viewfinder. If they are not equal, the multiplier
The remote control panels may be used for either of two
gain control should be adjusted to make them equal. As
a result of the stabilized circuitry in both the preamplifier
and the high voltage supply, this adjustment of correct
signal level remains accurate for a considerable period
of time.
modes of operation. The desired mode of operation is
selected by a simple jumper arrangement in the camera
and processor. In the clamp -on -black mode of operation
the functions of the remote control knobs are as follows.
The iris control is adjusted to maintain the correct light
TK-60A Camera Control
Essentially all of the setup controls in the TK -60A equipment are located in the camera where the viewfinder and
a built -in calibration signal provide the measuring facilities required for setup adjustment, while only operating
controls are placed at the camera control position. A
previously adjusted camera may therefore be placed into
service without need for adjusting setup controls at the
camera or at the control position.
Setup functions at the camera include the usual adjustments for the image orthicon such as beam, beam alignment, target voltage, target calibration, orthicon focus,
multiplier focus, and G6. A separate control for the
wall -mesh electrode in the image orthicon tube is also
located in the camera. Size and centering control (dual
centering controls to accommodate reversal of scanning)
and linearity adjustments are located on the deflection
subchassis, while preset shading controls appear on the
auxiliary subchassis.
Operating controls which are located on the camera include turret handle, optical focusing control, and manual
control for rotating the neutral density filter holder, and
two switches for reversing directions of horizontal and
vertical scanning, respectively. The turret handle and
focusing control retain the general locations and modes
of operation to which cameramen have become accustomed in earlier RCA cameras. All of the operating controls listed in this group are conveniently located at or
near the rear of the camera.
exposure to the photo cathode of the image orthicon. The
contrast control functions as a video gain control. The
brightness control is utilized to maintain the desired black
level.
the clamp-on -white mode of operation the iris control
operates as above. The adjustment of the contrast control alters the level of the black information of the video
signal with reference to the fixed peak white level as
established by preset adjustment of the white clomp reference in the camera. The brightness control is adjusted to
establish the desired black level to which the black video
information is adjusted by the contrast control.
In
Two alternate versions of the remote control panel are
available, identical in electrical function but designed to
accommodate different mounting requirements. The MI26008 Remote Control Panel is 11'1'6 by 2 -21 32 inches
in size and is designed for mounting beneath the master
monitor in the space provided in the MI -26786 thirteen inch console housing. The MI -26007 Remote Control Panel
is 73/4 by 2'
inches in size and is designed to mount in
the space provided in the front of a TM -35 Portable
Master Monitor.
Electronic Lens Cap
A special new feature, of considerable convenience when
the camera is left unattended, is an "electronic lens cap."
It may be applied at any time by either the cameraman
and simplified camera
two actual operating controls.
Ml -26007 (illustrated) for use
Ml -26008 for use
Small
Remote Control Panel
panel contains the three operating
controls of the TK -60A camera chain, consisting of the remote iris control, brightness and a contrast control. The
remote iris control is the principal operating control in the
camera chain. An open -loop servo system drives all four
lenses on the turret simultaneously. In the MI -26882 series
of lenses, the iris scales are linear and identical in all
focal lengths. Thus the calibrated scale at the control
(either at the rear of the camera or on the remote control
panel as determined by a selector switch) shows the
actual iris setting for any lens in the turret.
The remote control
remote control panel contains only
Two versions of panel are available,
with
with
TK -60
TK -60
Field Camera
Studio Chains.
Chains, and
CAMERAS
or the video operator. Tallies at both locations show when
the camera has been capped. A switch cuts off the accelerating voltage in the image section of the pickup tube
and applies a bias of about 4 volts to the target; thus
the picture is effectively removed from the tube.
Built -in Image Orbiter
Electromagnetic image orbiting and immobilization, completely self -contained in the camera, are provided at a
speed of 1 rpm. A switch at the back of the camera permits orbiting with or without image immobilization or
turning the orbiting system off. In the "off" position, a red
tally warns operator that the orbiter is not operating.
Processor
The processor is a rack -mounted unit built on a standard
bath -tub chassis occuping 153/4 inches of rack space. It
contains all of the circuits for processing the signal delivered by the camera preamplifier and for providing three
separate outputs to the signal switching and distribution
system. It contains receptacles for the camera cable, power
input to the camera chain, and intercom and remote control circuits. Also included are a 24 -volt power supply
and other components required for a self -contained intercom system.
The bandwidth of the video preamplifier and processor
amplifier (including cable equalizing networks) is 8 mc
within ±1/2 db. The improved signal -to -noise ratio obtainable with the new 41/2 -inch I.O. tube is sufficient to permit
the use of considerable aperture correction to enhance
the already improved detail response of the larger tube.
Circuits are included in the processor for providing up to
13 db of aperture correction peaked at 6.0 mc, with
continuously variable amplitude adjustment. The same
image orthicon charactertistics which permit the use of
aperture correction also permit the use of gamma correction. Three preset values (0.7, 0.8 and 1.0) may be
selected by a switch without affecting output video level.
Rackmounted Camera Processor, MI26003.
Semiconductor Power Supply
A Type WP -16B power supply, completely tubeless and
with a current rating of 1.6 amperes at 280 volts, provides the necessary regulated power for the camera, processor and TM -6C master monitor. It also includes the
necessary subchassis units which supply unregulated voltage and centering current required in the camera. Designed
for minimum heat radiation and space consumption, it
occupies only seven inches of rack space.
All power transformers in the camera, processor and the
trcnsistorized WP -16B regulated power supply are of
the self -regulating type. They permit variation in line voltage between 95 and 130 volts or 190 and 260 volts without any need for changing transformer voltage taps. This
feature also provides automatic compensation for the drop
in a -c supply voltage to the camera over the camera
cable up to a length of 1,000 feet. In addition, it gives
A single WP-16B Semi- Conductor Power Supply powers entire
TK -60A Camera Chain.
Accurate Cable Compensation
The processor also includes a tap switch for introducing
video equalization to compensate for different lengths of
camera cable. This switch provides increments in compensation corresponding to 100 -foot increments in length up
to a maximum fo 1000 feet. The same switch assembly
includes equalizing circuits for the coax used for viewfinder feed.
11
CAMERAS
permits easy and rapid mounting of the camera. The
wedge mount adaptor may be easily attached to an existing cradle head by 8 screws.
Standard Camera Cable
Because of the very extensive use of RCA MI -94 type of
camera cable in nearly all television stations. The TK -60A
camera chain has been designed to use the same cable.
Installation of the new camera, therefore, does not require
replacement of existing cables. This is an important consideration in those cases where cables are routed through
conduits in studio walls and where large quantities of
MI -94 cables are already on hand. The camera cable
receptacle is located on the base of the camera at the
rear in the position which has become familiar in earlier
RCA cameras.
TK -60A FIELD CAMERA
standard camera cable and connectors for complete
interchangeability with existing equipment
TK -60A uses
.
assurance of stabilized heater voltages or all tubes and
increases the stability and performance of the regulated
d -c power supply.
Wedge Mount for Camera Head
A new type of positive mount for the camera on the
cradle head is provided in the form of a metal wedge
and a mating wedge mount adaptor. This type of fastening
Camera Wedge Mount permits easy mounting of camera with accurate
positioning and positive lock mechan'sm.
CHAIN
The TK -60A Field Camera Chain is similar to the TK -60A
Studio Camera equipment with the exception that the
TK -60A is packaged for portable field applications. The
major units of the TK -60A Field equipment consists of a
combined camera-viewfinder, a field processor, a Type
WP -16B power supply, a power supply field case, a TM -35
portable master monitor, and a remote control panel. The
camera chain is supplied complete with tubes including
image orthicon. A cradle head, Type TD -11A folding metal
tripod, set of interconnecting cables, set of camera cables
with connectors (50, 100 and 200 foot lengths), and a set
of three lenses complete the camera chain.
The camera -viewfinder unit of the TK -60A Field Camera
identical with that of the TK -60A Studio Camera
equipment. The field processor is similar to the rack mounting processor with the exception that the field unit is
housed in an attractive, portable field case and utilizes
field type connectors mounted on a sub -panel at one end
Chain
is
of the case. A similarly styled field case
is
supplied for the
WP -16B power supply. The camera remote control panel
fits into a space provided in the front of the TM -35 porta-
ble master monitor.
The TM -35 portable master monitor with remote control in
place may be mounted on any convenient operating table.
The field processor and WP -16B power supply may be
mounted beneath the desk since neither unit contains
operating controls.
44
Complete TK -60A Field Camera Chain, including camera with cradle head and tripod, portable master monitor with
camera remote control panel installed, field processor (at lower left) and WP -16B Power Supply in field case.
SPECIFICATIONS
General Specifications
of Reproduction
Number of Scanning Lines
Frame Repetition Rate
Fio!d Repetition Rate
Line Repetition Rate
Picture Signal
_
Monochrome
525 or 625
Type
30 or 25 per sec.
60 or 50 per sec.
15,750 ro 15,625 per sec.
1.0 volts, peak -to-peak composite, nominal
1.4 volts, peak -to -peak composite, optional
Black negative
Picture Polarity at Output
41/2 x 6 inches (8" kinescope)
Viewfinder Display Size
150 foot Lamberts Max.
Viewfinder Brightness
75 ohms
Impedance of Coax :al Transmission Line
1000 feet
Maximum Length of Camera Cable
Picture Quality
700 TV lines minimum in center,
500 TV lines minimum in corners
Nominal 36 -38 db peak -to -peak
Signal -to -Noise Ratio
signal RMS noise for bandwidth of 4.5 mc
Adjustable to zero at vertical rate
Square Wave Tilt
Not in excess of EIA specifications
Blanking S gnal Overshoots _ _
Overall Frequency Response:
-1- V2 db to 8 mc;
With 100 ft. Camera Cable__
down not more than 3 db at 10 mc
db to 8 mc;
With 1000 ft. Camera Cable
down not more than 4 db at 10 mc
Limiting Horizontal Resolution
yl
4:3
Scanning Aspect Ratio
Within i-1% normal
Scanning Linearity
Horizontal 10 %; Vertical 10%
Overscan Amplitude
Horizontal 7.6 µsec.; Vertical 635 µsec.
Retrace Intervals
Horizontal +10 %; Vertical ±20%
Range of Centering Ad;ustment
Approximately circular path 7% dia.
Orbiting
RPM. With immobilization, motion in
of picture height at
received picture not over 1%
1
Operational Specifications
Elapsed time to cover entire range: 2.0 sec.;
accuracy of setting: ±0.25 lens stop
....Range: 0% to 50% clipping of blacks
Contrast Control
Two -Way switch on remote control
Electronic Lens Cap Control
panel, operating in conjunction with similar switch on camera
Switchable to three preset values of
..
Gamma Correction
Remote Iris Control
_
Aperture Correction
Camera Cable Equalization)
I
0.7, 0.8 and 1.0
Peaked at 6.0 mc; amplitude adjustable
continuously from 0 to +13 db
Adjustable in steps of
100 ft. to a maximum of 1000 ft.
Coaxial lines for preamplifier output and for viewfinder signal input
are equalized simultaneously with identical compensating networks.
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical Specifications
Input:
Horizontal Drive.._
Vertical Drive
EIA Blanking
Effects Signal to Viewfinder
4.0
4.0
4.0
(Continued)
Equipment Supplied
-:0.5 volts, peak -to -peak negative"
±0.5 volts, peak -to -peak negative2
±0.5 volts, peak -to -peak negative2
Video at 0.7 volt nominal,
1.0 volt nominal, black negative
Audio Cue Signal
Balanced into 60 ohms at 2W level
Output:
Video No. 1, No. 2 and No. 3
Non -composite level either
0.7 or 1.0 volt, peak -to -peak black negative:t (Sync may be added
to any two outputs)
Isolation Between Any two Non -composite
Outputs
At least 46 db from 1 kc to 100 kc;
At least 30 db from 10 cps to 10 me
AC Power Input:
50 cycle
60 cycle
230 volt chain
115 volt chain
Line Frequency
50 cycles ±1 cycle
60 cycles ±1 cycle
Power Requirements (approx
total including master
itor and power supply)....
1200 watts
1200 watts
DC Power Load (from WP -16B Power Supply)
Including
Excluding
Type TK -60A Monochrome Studio Camera Chain including the following:
/15 V., 60 Cycle
Chain
Qty. MI Number
Description
26002 -A
Camera Viewfinder
26003 -A
Processor, Rack Mounting
26008
Remote Control Panel,
Console Mounting
26084 -B
Power Supply, WP -16B
26083 -A
Centering Current Subchassis
26082 -A
Unregulated High Voltage Subchassis
1
1
Regulated,
+280
V
Unregulated, ±400 V
Centering Current, -4 V
1350 ma
TM -6C
900 ma
190 ma
1450 ma
190 ma
1000 ma
26882 -A3
26882 -A4
26882 -A5
26373
26877 -A
26725 -E5
-A
26786
26136-C
26579-B
26667
26655
Lens, 50mm, f'2.0
Lens, 75mm, f /2.0
Lens, 127mm, f 2.8
-6AU5
-6EM5
2 -6DQ5
-8HP4
-6688
2 -6922
3 -7308
21 -7586
1
1
4-1N1734
1- 1N3020B
1
-2N329A
1
2 -2N369
1
3 -2N404
1-7295B
2 -2'4585
1
-2N706
1- 2N1132
1
-2N 1233
2-2N2219
1-2N2323
2-2N2349
1
1
1
2-GV3A-1300R
1-M-42C-9.8
3-PS1148
2-SV4010A
1-SV4091 A
Processor:
2 -6BC7
2 -6BX7
2- 12AX7
1
-6080
7 -6688
1
-7119
12 -7308
1
-2N369
1- 2N2219
Mechanical Specifications
Overall Dimensions:
Camera- Viewfinder
Camera Case.._
15" wide, 191/2" high, 261/4" long
Total with Viewfinder Hood, Turret,
Iris Drive and Tally Light
15" wide, 22" high, 36" long
Processor (Rack Mounting)
19" wide, 151/2" high, 10" deep
Field Processor
81/2" wide, 181" high, 23" long
Remote Control Panel
(TM -35 Mounting)
73/4" wide, 21/8" high, 31/2" deep
Remote Control Panel,
(Console Mounting)
116' wide, 2-21/32" high, 31/2" deep
WP-16B Power Supply,
Rack Mounting
19" wide, 7" high, 131/2" deep
Field Case for WP -16B
Power Supply
81/2" wide, 181/2" high, 271/2" long
TM -6C Master Monitor
131/e" wide, 18" high, 20" deep
TM -35 Portable Master Monitor. 81/2" wide, 15'/e" high, 203/4" deep
Console Housing.
_
121/4" wide, 441/4" high max., 46" deep max.
Weight:
Camera -Viewfinder
Processor, Rack Mounted
Field Processor
Remote Control Panel, TM -35 Mounting
Remote Control Panel, Console Mounting
WP -16B Power Supply, Rack Mounting
WP -16B Power Supply in Field Case
TM -6C Master Monitor_._
TM -35 Portable Master Monitor
Console Housing, 13 -inch
150 lbs.
60 lbs.
70 lbs.
11/2 lbs.
2 lbs.
.71 lbs.
80 lbs.
55 lbs.
49 lbs.
75 lbs.
1
1
1
1
Viewfinder Hood _
Image Orthicon, RCA 7295 -B
Camera Cable, 50 feet
Wedge Mount
Console Housing, 13 -inch
Master Monitor, TM -6C
Blower for TM -6C
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CRO, RCA Type 5ABP1
Kinescope, RCA Type 10SP4
Type TK -60A Monochrome
26008
26094 -B
26083-A
26082-A
26882 -A3
26882 -A4
26882 -A5
26373
26877-A
26725 -E5
26884 -A
26786
N26136 -C
556579 -B
26667
26655
1
1
_
1
1
Field Camera Chain including the following-
Chain
Qty. MI Number
Camera Viewfinder:
1
1
115 V., 60 Cycle
Tube and Semiconductor Complement
556002 -A
556003 -A
1
1
mon-26884
TM -6C
230 V., 50 Cycle
Chain
Qty. MI Number
Description
Camera Viewfinder
Field Processor
Remote Control Panel,
TM -35 Mounting
26084 -B
Power Supply, WP -16B
26083 -A Centering Current Subchassis
26082 -A Unregulated High Voltage Subchassis
26216
Field Case for WP -16B
26882 -A3 Lens, 50mm, f /2,0
26882 -A4 Lens, 75mm, f /2.0
26882 -A5 Lens, 127mm, f/2.8
26373
Viewfinder Hood
26154
Portable Master Monitor, TM -35
26877 -A
Image Orthicon, Type 7295 -B
26359
Set of Interconnecting Cables
26725 -E5 Camera Cable, 50 feet
26725 -E6 Camera Cable, 107 feet
26725-E7 Camera Cable, 200 feet
26884-A
Wedge Mount
26203 -A
Cradle Head
26046
Tripod, Type TD -11
26002 -A
26009-A
26007
230 V., 50 Cycle
Chain
Qty. MI Number
556002 -A
556009 -A
1
1
26007
26094-B
26083-A
26082-A
N26216
26882-A3
26882-A4
26882-AS
26373
556154
26877-A
26359
26725-E5
26725-F6
26725-E7
26884-A
26203-A
26046
Optional and Accessory Equipment
Cradle Head
Television Pedestal, Type TD -3A
TD -3A Counterweights (25 lbs.) required for TK -60 __
Console Well Adaptor for MI -26008 Remote Control Panel
Rack Adaptor for MI -26008 Remote Control Panel
Rack Adaptor for MI -26007 Remote Control Panel
Left Panel Assembly and Side Cover for Console Housing
Right Panel Assembly and Side Cover for Console Housing
Upper Left Side Cover Only
Upper Right Side Cover Only
Shock Mount for Processor
Shock Mount for WP -16B
Shock Mount for TM -35
Spare Video Preamplifier for TK-60A Camera ._ _ ._
Spare Remote Iris Drive Assembly for TK-60A Camera
Spare I.O. Yoke Assembly for TK -60A Camera
.
2
3
MI- 26203 -A
MI -26036
MI -26391
MI -26252
MI -26254
MI-26887 -2
MI- 26788 -1
MI- 26788 -2
MI-26789 -1
MI. 26789 -2
MI- 26511 -A6
MI- 26511 -A5
MI- 26511 -A3
MI -26006
MI -26019
MI -26004
Pulse widths as specified by EIA in RS -170. Terminals for signals are
arranged for loop- through connections with isolating filters.
Circuits terminated at sending end and Z
75 ohms.
-
CAMERAS
Color
Camera Chain
TYPE TK -41C
FEATURES
All- purpose live color TV camera providing
low noise, high resolution picture
Performance independent of line voltage
variation over wide range
All controls conveniently located -only one
master control needed for on -air operation
of camera chain
Built -in camera cable equalization
Optical orbiter extends life of I.O. tubes
Forced -air ventilation of pick -up tubes
Prism optics eliminate "ghosts"
Precision yokes allow precise registration
Single camera cable included
Optional console mounting or rack mounting available for camera control equipment
Stable, fixed, plug -in gamma corrector units
Uses standard TV and zoom lenses
Short warm -up period and drift -free operation achieved by use of highly stabilized
circuits throughout camera
CAMERAS
STANDARD OIL OF KEh
0
RETTER CARE OF
Ease
of manipulation will delight the studio cameraman and aids in maintaining smooth program performance.
DESCRIPTION
The RCA TK -41C Color Camera Chain provides the tele-
vision broadcast station with the ideal means of originating beautiful, full -color programs. Live color programming permits maximum realization of the benefits of
color- adding
a brilliant new dimension to programming
techniques and presenting commercial products in thrilling
reality. Local color originations of studio programs and
commercials, sporting events, community parades and
festivals can build station prestige and stimulate sponsor
interest. Live color commercial inserts and station breaks
between color network and color film features hold and
strengthen viewer interest by maintaining color program
continuity. Color mobile units, designed to handle up to
five color cameras, are available to extend the use of
color cameras to a broad variety of field programming
applications.
Dependable and Economical Performance
Designed with the objective of providing an easily operated, space- conserving and economical color television
pick -up system, the TK -41 series of cameras have earned
wide acceptance throughout the broadcast industry. Their
performance and reliability have been thoroughly proven
by extensive use under daily operating conditions. The
camera is easily handled and is designed for operation
by a single cameraman. A cradle type camera mounting
head, which accurately maintains the camera in balance
about its own center of gravity, results in maneuverability
and convenience of operation comparable to that of
monochrome studio camero equipment.
The TK-41C camera employs
the some complement of
standard lenses as monochrome camera equipment. The
camera control equipment includes a processing amplifier
which is identical with that used with the RCA Type TK -26C
3- Vidicon Color Film Chain. Centralized controls provide
minimum setup time. During "on -air" operation, the camera control operator can control signal processing for
best picture quality by the use of only one knob. Control
operations can be located at a console or rack position
as desired.
CAMERAS
KINE
VIDEO
LEVEL
SINGLE
CAMERA
VIEWFINDER
CONTROL
PANEL
CABLE
CAMERA
R
t
II
APERTURE
COMPENSATOR
CONTROL
PANEL
G
PROCESSING
B
AMPLIFIER
COLORPLEXER
PREAMP
PICKUP TUBES
AUTOMATIC
BLACK & WHITE
KINE
f
MASTER
MONITOR
CRO_
CARRIE
R
BALANCE
TR I-COLOR
KINE
i
COLOR
MONITOR
I
Simplified diagram showing major components of the TK41C Color Camera Chain. The
lineup features considerable space and cost saving advantages over previous color chains
Camera Chain Components
is functionally similar
monochrome camera chains in that is consists of a
live pick -up camera in addition to signal processing, control and monitor units. The major equipment units include
the color camera, viewfinder, camera control panel,
processing amplifier, TM-21D color monitor, TX-1D Color plexer with aperture compensator and automatic carrier
balance, TM -6C master monitor, and power supplies.
The TK -41C Color Camera Chain
to
The color camera proper contains a light splitting prism
optical system, three image orthicon tubes to provide red,
blue and green signals, horizontal and vertical deflection
circuits for the image orthicons, a target blanking circuit,
regulated high voltage and negative voltage circuit, image
orthicon protection circuit, and three plug -in video preamplifiers, one for each of the three color channels. The
electronic viewfinder includes a 7TP4 kinescope with necessary deflection and video circuits to provide a picture
for the camera operator.
processing amplifier feeds a monochrome master
monitor, which provides both kinescope and CRO displays
of signals at various vital points in the system, selected by
push- button. A colorplexer combines the processed video
signals into a single FCC standard color signal. The color plexer feeds a tri -color monitor and the camera switching
system. This unit accepts the red, green and blue signals
from the image orthicons and transforms them to M, I,
and Q signals. These are adjusted with respect to bandwidth and delay and then multiplexed to produce one
composite signal from the three input signals. An aperture
compensator connects in series with the luminance channel
of the colorplexer. The output of the colorplexer is fed
to the studio video switching system. A TM -21 D Color
Monitor is also included in the chain and is utilized at the
camera control position to provide a check on the quality
of the final color picture.
The
TK-41C Color Camera
The three video signals from the color camera are fed
The RCA Color Camera contains the three image orthicon
directly to the camera control panel on which both operating and selected set -up controls are located. These
signals are in turn fed to the processing amplifier which
performs the functions of cable compensation, video
amplification, blanking and shading insertion, feedback
clamping, linear clipping, gamma correction and output
amplification as well as providing auxiliary switching for
the master monitor kinescope and CRO.
pick -up tubes with their focus, deflection and beam alignment coils, complete horizontal and vertical deflection circuits, the video preamplifiers, blowers, light -splitting
optical system, turret with four lens positions, and means
for adjusting optical focus and remote iris opening.
is entirely self -contained with the exception
of the d -c power supplies, video processing amplifier and
The camera
CAMERAS
COMPLETE ACCESSIBILITY to all circuits and controls makes maintenance and servicing of RCA color camera a pleasure for both operators and service technicians.
CAMERAS
certain electrical controls which are located for operating
convenience at the camera control panel. All electrical
connections to the camera are made through a single
eighty -two conductor camera cable attached by a connector in such manner as to permit the cable to be
brought toward the front of the camera, drawn through
a special cable clamping bracket, and then draped in a
gradual curve to the floor out of way of the cameraman.
Physically the TK-41C Color Camera is 141/2 inches high, 44
inches long, and the width tapers from 16 inches at the
front to a maximum of 21 inches at the rear edges of the
side door covers. On the front end of the camera is the
lens turret, and on the rear are the local electrical setup controls and the control handle for rotating the turret.
The optical focus handle is located on the right. This focus
control and the turret handle are normally the only two
controls which require the attention of the cameraman during a television program.
Improved Operational Stability
The TK-41C incorporates a number of design improvements
for ease of operation and assurance of highest picture
quality. A new focus current regulator holds focus current
to within 0.1 per cent for accurate and stable registration.
A low impedance blanking circuit provides immunity to
horizontal deflection crosstalk. The addition of temperature
compensation to the vertical deflection coils has reduced
the required camera warmup period and assures longterm stability of registration. Vernier adjustments are provided for horizontal and vertical size, linearity, skew and
centering adjustments. Excellent stability of color balance
has resulted from stabilization of the image orthicon multiplier gain. Through "super regulation" techniques the
image orthicon electrode voltages are maintained to 0.25
per cent, thereby virtually eliminating electrical focus drift.
A stabilized beam current supply assures optimum signal to -noise ratio and proper shading of the picture over long
periods without touchup.
Electro- Mechanical Lens Cap
A remote-controlled douser type optical lens cap permits
precise adjustment of black level and precision adjustment
of color balance for precise matching of cameras. An
improved field lens holder maintains precise alignment of
the field lenses on the optical axis and avoids vignetting,
while a new turret and detent mechanism provides noise free rotation of the lens turret. Camera test facilities have
been centralized with test probe points and selector
switches grouped on a convenient test panel within the
controls shown above are all conveniently located behind
hinged doors. Only two handle controls are needed for on-air operation of camera.
Set -up
camera. New full -length side doors provide substantially
improved access to the camera interior.
Transistor Intercom System
Two sets of communication and program sound and associated volume controls jacks are mounted on a strip in-
stalled below the back operating panel at the rear of the
camera. A transistor intercom system provides high level
voice communications between the camera operator, the
camera control operator, and the program director or
other studio personnel. Variable volume controls allow
individual adjustment of sound level. Electrical registration
controls are also located on the rear plate of the camera
behind hinged covers. They include the following independent controls: red and blue skew, with polarity reversing switch, height, width, and vertical and horizontal Q
adjustment. An off -on switch operates the blower motors.
An overscan switch is also provided. The G -5 controls are
located just inside the left side cover near the rear of
the camera. Dynode gain controls are similarly located
on the right side.
Complete Accessibility
The side door panels of the camera housing swing out-
ward making all components readily accessible for servic-
CAME RAS
ing. From the cameraman's position, the right side door
exposes the hinged horizontal deflection chassis, which
may be swung 180 degrees from its normal position, permitting replacement of tubes and access to the remote
iris synchro motor driving mechanism and other parts of
the optical system. The yoke assembly of the red channel
and the tube side of the red channel video preamplifier
are also exposed. When the left side panel is dropped,
the hinged vertical deflection chassis can also be swung
with a knob type control which may be adjusted to give
minimum streaking for the associated image orthicon. The
last two stages are a feed -back pair, providing cathode
output to the 51 -ohm camera cables and to the viewfinder.
There is an adjustable trimmer in this stage which affects
the response curve tilt at the high- frequency end. Each of
the preamplifiers is shock mounted and bonded to the
cross members of the upper camera framing.
outward 180 degrees. It permits further access to elements
of the optical plate assembly, and the blue and green
channel yoke assemblies. The Type 4415 or 4416 Image
Orthicon tubes can be replaced by removing a single holding screw of each yoke assembly and swinging the yoke assembly out the sides of the camera. The yoke assemblies
have been designed and are held to very close tolerances
so that when used with Precision Image Orthicons very
precise registration is obtainable.
Two tally lights are mounted on the front face of the
cornera. They serve to indicate to the actors when the
camera is in actual use. In addition, there is one on top
of the viewfinder for directors and one on the kinescope
Raising the ventilation hood at the front of the camera
gives access to the connections of two heater transformers
Filtered Forced -Air Ventilation
area as well as the relay lens. The elapsed time
indicator is visible when the hood is raised. Viewfinder
component and circuit tests together with tube replacements may be made with the viewfinder cover in the
raised position.
the
in this
The viewfinder may be removed from the camera to pro-
vide access to wiring of the hinged shelf type chassis at
the rear of the camera. This shelf is used for tie points
for the image orthicon sockets, and for filtering corn ponents of the deflection circuits. Included here are the
three video preamplifier input coupling and filter circuits.
The image orthicon protection circuit with its associated
tube and relay is also mounted here. Loss of either the
vertical or horizontal deflection to the yokes of any of the
image orthicons in the camera causes the circuit to bias
off the image orthicons. This prevents the beam from
being concentrated in a single line or spot which might
cause permanent damage.
Plug -In Video Preamplifiers
Removing the viewfinder also gives access to the plug -in
preamplifiers located just ahead of the top shelf. These
supply the red, blue and green signals to the camera
cables and the camera viewfinder. Each of the preamplifiers includes six stages. The first four are simple shunt peaked stages. The second stage has a screwdriver
adjusted cathode peaking circuit for adjusting tilt in the
low- frequency end of the response curve of the amplifiers.
In the cathode of the third stage there is a similar circuit
bezel plate for the operator. The latter are operative,
however, only when used in conjunction with a camera
switching unit. The lights are normally off until a tally
relay is actuated by a control voltage (24 volts d -c).
individual image orthicon tubes and the area within
camera housing are forced -air cooled. Separate
blowers are used to cool the individual image orthicon
tubes. Cooling air is brought into the socket end of each
yoke assembly by means of flexible hose leading from
its associated blower. Replaceable air filters reduce the
necessity for frequent cleaning of the optical system. All
external areas of the camera and viewfinder have an
aluminum finish to further aid in maintaining optimum
temperature conditions within the camera. Two utility outThe
lets and a fuse are mounted on the under side at the back
end of the camera. They provide facilities for an independ-
ent source of a -c that may be used for test equipment.
Prism Optical System
The
rotatable lens turret accommodates four objective
lenses. A set of camera lenses having focal lengths of 50,
90, and 135 mm is supplied. Telephoto lense may also
be mounted on the turret. The optical axis of the taking
lens is at the bottom section of the turret. The turret is
attached to a shaft that protrudes through a stationary
drum. The drum serves as a light trap as well as a support
for the lens turret shaft. Each objective lens has a matching
field lens mounted on a "spider" support housed within
the drum. The objective lenses and associated field lenses
remain properly matched at each selected position of the
lens turret. Lens selection is achieved by means of a handle
type manual control on the back panel of the camera.
Optical focus is accomplished by moving the lens turret
longitudinally along the optical axis. This is done by rotat-
COMPENSATING LENSES
FRONT SURFACE MIRROR
PRISM OPTICS
NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER
RELAY
TURRET
LENSES
TRIMMING FILTERS
FIELD LENS
ORBITItIG
I
OPTICAL WEDGE
1St
1
i
ELECTROMECHANICAL
LENS CAP
OBJECTIVE
LENS
REMOTE
CONTROLLED
IRIS
¡NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER
GREEN
I
O
NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER
TRIMMING FILTER
FRONT SURFACE MIRROR
Optical system diagram for
ing the focus handle located at the right rear of camera.
Focusing secondary image on each of the red, blue and
green image orthicons is achieved by sliding the individual
image orthicon yoke assemblies backward or forward
along their respective optical axis during initial set -up.
A complete relay optical system is mounted behind the
field lenses. It consists of a de- polarizing filter, relay lenses,
remote control iris, prism -dichroic blocks, light filters, front
surface reflective mirrors and field flatteners. The purpose
of this system is to separate the light image into three
primary color images and direct each to the photo- sensitive cathode of an individual image orthicon tube. The
individual components in this system are mounted on a
supporting base plate. The complete unit can be taken
from the camera by removing four screws that secure the
base plate to the camera frame and then disconnecting
the cable attached to the iris control selsyn.
Sealed Dichroic Surfaces
surfaces are sealed within a solid prism
optical block to eliminate any multiple reflections within
the optical system and to prevent deterioration of the
dichroic surfaces from dust or handling.
The dichroic
Color trimming filters are used in conjunction with the
prism -dichroic surfaces to adjust the overall spectral sensitivity curves as desired for the color camera. The front
TK -41C
Color Camera.
surface mirrors are adjustable in two directions in order
to center the image on the red and blue image orthicons
after the camera is positioned to center the image on the
green image orthicon. These mirror adjustment controls
are brought to the outside of the light tight optical assembly so that adjustment can be made in strong light without
removing the light box covers. No special tools are required for these adjustments. The neutral density filters
required to balance the sensitivity of the three channels
can likewise all be inserted without removing the light
tight covers. The three image orthicon tubes are mounted
within focus and scanning coil assemblies, located at the
rear of the optical assembly. Located directly ahead of the
photo cathode of each image orthicon is a field flattener
lens. These lenses serve as part of the relay optical assembly to provide an evenly illuminated image with good
corner geometry and focus.
Optical Image Orbiter
Located in a vertical plane in front of the relay lens
assembly is a rotating circular glass plate with a slight
taper that gives a circular movement to the image on the
photocathodes of the image orthicon tubes. The unit is
driven by an a -c motor at a rate of approximately one
orbiting cycle per minute. The picture movement is so
slight and so slow that it is not apparent to the viewer;
CAMERAS
however, it virtually eliminates image burn -in on the image
orthicon tubes. This extends the life of the image orthicons
and reduces operating costs.
parable to that of the RCA monochrome camera. The
TK-41C is provided with a TD -9C Motor Driven Pedestal for
general studio use.
Stabilized Camera Viewfinder
The TK-41C camera control
The viewfinder
is used by the operator of the color camera
to frame the scene, to aid in focusing the camera, and to
facilitate in setting up the camera registration. The viewfinder consists of a monochrome kinescope provided with
deflection, blanking and video circuits required to provide
a picture for the camera operator. A six push- button
selector switch at the right of the viewing screen enables
the operator to view any channel separately, to view the
red or the blue superimposed on the green, or to view all
three images superimposed. The focus, brightness, and
contrast controls are mounted to the left of the viewing
screen.
units may be conveniently
mounted in the Control Console. This control position includes: (1) a TM -6C Master Monitor mounted in its Console
Housing with the Video Level Control Panel, and (2) a
Master Console Housing in which the Camera Control
Panel and the Processing Amplifier may be mounted. This
Master Console Housing is designed to mount the 19 -inch
Camera Control Panel in the indented section of the console desk and the Processing Amplifier in the top sloping
portion of the console. The camera control equipment
also includes a TM-21D Color Monitor. This may be suspended from the wall or ceiling or set upon a stand.
the kinescope image.
If preferred, all of the TK-41C control equipment may be
rack mounted with the exception of the color monitor. In
this case a Rack Mounted Control Desk and Accessory Kit,
MI- 40415, is available to provide desk space at the rack
location.
The single channel positions are used when making adjustments on individual channels; the red on green and blue
Simplified Control Panel
The ultor and focus voltages of the kinescope are regulated with corona type regulators. This provides a wide
range of kinescope brightness change without defocusing
green are useful for registration adjustments. The
switching is accomplished by altering the bias on the input
amplifier tubes; each of these tubes is kept at cutoff except
when it is desired to view the particular signal connected
to its input. Blanking pulses of adjustable duration are produced by two multivibrators (triggered by horizontal and
vertical drive) and added to the video signal before
application to the viewfinder kinescope. A d -c restorer is
included to maintain optimum contrast and brightness of
the viewfinder over a wide range of scene content and
compositions.
on
viewfinder is designed to slide in guides and lock in
position directly above the camera. All signal and operating voltages are fed to the unit through a self -aligning
socket connection that automatically engages when the
unit slides into place. A pull handle to facilitate the installation and removal of the viewfinder is located on its
operating panel just below the viewing screen. To the left
of this handle is a thumb latch to release the unit from a
locked position. The viewfinder is covered by a multi louvered hood which can be raised to facilitate ease in
servicing the unit. A detachable viewing hood (MI- 40502)
is attached to the viewfinder control panel for shielding
the viewing screen from extraneous light.
The
Camera Mounting Equipment
A cradle type tilt head, designed especially for use with
the color camera, provides ease of maneuverability in both
tilting and panning of the camera and viewfinder, corn-
The Camera Control Panel, on which the remote control
adjustments of the color camera are mounted, is located
in the sloping portion of the desk section of the 19 -inch
Master Monitor and Processing Amplifier mounted in
new console housings. The consoles are also designed to
house Camera Control Panel, Color Monitor, and other
camera chain equipment.
CAMERAS
console which houses the processing amplifier. It lies below
and in front of the processing amplifier front panel, and
has a cover plate through which only two controls protrude. These are thé Pedestal and Iris Control knobs. The
latter operates the remote iris selsyn motor in the optical
system, and is the only control required during program
origination. Mounted directly above this control, in the
processing amplifier panel, is the iris f -stop indicator
meter. In normal operation, the remote iris control performs the function of overall gain control for the complete
color camera chain. The master pedestal control provides
simultaneous adjustment of the pedestal voltage in the
three channels. Set -up controls for each of the three
image orthicons may be reached by lifting the cover plate.
Colored knobs identify the three video channels. The individual channel controls include horizontal and vertical
centering, alignment, orthicon focus, multiplier focus, image
focus, image accelerator voltage and target voltage.
Also provided is a target test knob to aid in setting target
voltage accurately and rapidly, as well as a selector switch
which permits the metering of: target, orth focus, image
focus and multiplier focus voltage settings in each color
channel.
Video Level Control Panel
The Video Level Control Panel
is
mounted adjacent to the
MI -40535 Camera Control Panel. The Video Level Con-
trol Panel consists of three attenuator pads located in the
video line between the Processing Amplifier and the Color plexer to allow precise settings of the white balance,
thereby completely eliminating pedestal- riding during programming. The control may also be used to introduce
color shifts of precisely controlled amplitude into the picture to compensate for minor color differences between
cameras. The pads are thus used as trimmer adjustments to
achieve true color picture uniformity between cameras.
Compact Processing Amplifier
The Processing Amplifier of the TK -41C has been designed
to perform a great number of functions in a single versatile
unit. Integration of these electrical functions in a single
unit results in a simple, space-conserving system. Use of
this design allows set -up time to be substantially reduced
and requires fewer video operators and control room engineers for programming. Hence considerable savings in
operating costs can be realized. A large reduction in power
required as well as increased tube life due to extremely
conservative operation of tubes further reduce costs, at
the same time improving performance and overall quality.
amplifier are
three plug -in video amplifiers which perform accurately
and with extreme stability the following functions: cable
The basic circuit elements in the processing
Optional rack mounting for the TK -41C control equipment may be
specified. A convenient desk with top panel removed to reveal setup
ccntrols is shown above.
compensation, video amplification, blanking insertion,
shading insertion, feedback clamping, linear clipping,
gamma correction, and output amplification. Pulse circuitry
needed for the camera and shading generators, is obtained from stabilized multi -vibrators. These multi- vibrators
provide pulses of constant amplitude and width independent of the incoming pulse. These circuits require no
tube selection and are completely stable. Shading signals
are provided for insertion of either horizontal or vertical
shading. A fourth plug -in unit serves as the video section
of an electronic switcher which is an integral part of the
main chassis. The switcher, used with Master Monitor,
TM -6C, provides an individual or combined presentation
of red, blue and green video.
The entire chassis of the processing amplifier is drawer slide mounted for easy pull -out for servicing. The front
panel is hinged, thus permitting it to be opened to facilitate removal of tubes and servicing of other components
behind the panel.
CAMERAS
An edge -lighted translucent plastic escutcheon is mounted
on the outside surface of the panel to provide illumination
of the nomenclature for the various controls when the unit
is operated in semi -darkness. All controls are conveniently
mounted on the panel. Thirteen lucite pushbuttons at the
top of the panel control the switching arrangement which
permits separate Master Monitor Kinescope or CRO observation of important test points, including individual
channels, various channels superimposed, and colorplexer
output. A staircase signal for the CRO circuit is provided
for a sequential display of red, blue, and green channels.
Precision Master and Color Monitors
The Type TM -6C Master Monitor provides in a compact
form a complete monitoring unit for the observation of
the camera chain's video signals. It is used for both
picture (kinescope) and waveform (oscilloscope) monitoring
of signals at any stage of transmission from the camera to
the output of the colorplexer. Careful scrutinization of a
number of details of the video signal may be performed
which will aid in maintaining proper level and color balance, as well as obtaining registration during set -up.
The unit employs a special ten -inch aluminized, straight
gun, electro- statically focused kinescope for direct picture
monitoring and a five -inch, flat faced, cathode ray tube
for waveform presentation. When used with the processing
amplifier of the color camera, the wide band CRO display
consists of three adjacent waveforms corresponding to the
red, blue, and green video signals.
The Color Control Monitor, Type TM-21D, provides an
accurate, stabilized color picture display at high brightness level and is extremely useful in pinpointing parts of
the color chain requiring adjustment. The equipment affords the control operator precision checks on camera
registration, color balance, shading, deflection and transmission system transients, and effects of pedestal adjustments, as well as camera deflection linearity, chroma level
and phase of hue adjustments. It greatly simplifies camera
Type TM -21D Color Monitor, MI- 40226 -D, provides stable, accurate
color picture display for continuous checks of picture quality.
matching and provides a standard against which color
performance can be evaluated. Long term stability of the
monitor is assured by liberal use of feedback. Time devoted to monitor adjustments is negligible.
Optional Rack Mounting of Camera Controls
All the units normally housed in the consoles- Master
Monitor, Control Panel and Processing Amplifier may be
rack mounted. To complete the camera chain, a Color plexer, aperture compensator, automatic carrier balance,
focus current regulator and a set of two WP -16B power
supplies also mount in standard 84 -inch cabinet racks.
Television Color Camera Chain
Power, Space, Tube and Weight Information
Equipment
Color Camera -Deft.
MI
40534
Tubes
40
-Preamp.
Viewfinder
Processing Amplifier
40501 -A
40520 -A
40524 -B
40541
22
55
4
6
29
D -C mn
225 +(210 at 360 v.)
330
125 + (65 at 360 v.)
360
Current Regulator
12
Voltage Regulator
34+
Colorplexer
40209 -C
280
Automatic Carrier Balance
40416 -A
5
20
Aperture Compensator
40414
2
33
TM -6C Master Monitor
26136 -C
31
450
TM -21D Color Monitor
40226 -D
61
WP-16B Power Supply (2 Units) 26084 -B
*1600 each
WP -16B Centering Current Unit 26083 -A
1000
WP -16B Unregulated High
Voltage Unit
26082 -A
250
* 1600 ma with no unregulated current -1350 ma with 250 ma unregulated current.
Focus
Focus
-
-
132
Total Heat
277
58
175
85
117
200
90
A -C Watts
17
5
90
180
15
10
15
90
900
700 ea.
220
900
Rock Space
Weight
250
10I/2"
514"
31/2"
21"
31/2"
13/4"
18"
7" ea.
45
50V2
22
71/2
34
10
3
55
213
50 ea.
2
3
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical
Regulated
CAMERA:
D -C
Min.
volts, (neg.)
peak -to -peak
Min. 2 volts, (neg.)
peak -to -peak
Vertical Drive from Processing Amp -51 Ohm
2
Regulated
Camera
Preamplifiers
280 volts, 245 ma
280 volts, (3x110) ma
Unregulated
360 volts, 210 ma
78 ma
24 volts d -c
Camera and Deflection
Focus Coil Current
Tally Lights (Relay Controls)
Dimensions
Output:
Video
Video
Video
Video
15/32" high
117 v.,
50/60 cycle,
1
2(K," long
Tube Complement
CAMERA:
5-12AT7
2-12AU7-A
12-6AH6-WA
3-5687-WA
1-6922
1-6AU5-GT
1-GV3A-1300
2-4415 I.O.
1-4416 I.O.
1-6AL5
3-6CB5-A
2-6V6-GT
2-1B3-GT
51
Ohm
4-6U8-A
VIEWFINDER:
2 -6AB4
1-6C B6-A
-6197
1-6DQ6-B
1
VIEWFINDER:
Input:
Video Signals (negative)
Horizontal Drive (negative -Hi- impedance)
Vertical Drive (negative -Hi- impedance)
1- 6AH6 -WA
2-1 X2-B
-6AL5
-6AQ5-A
3-12AT7
5-12AY7
1
0.6 volt, peak-to -peak
2 volts, peak -to -peak
2 volts, peak -to -peak
Power (from power supply):
Regulated
Unregulated
Tally Lights (Relay Controls)
D -C
A -C Power
wide x
50'/2 lbs.
phase, 132 watts
Flat to 6 me
0.3 volt, peak -to -peak
0.6 volt, peak -to -peak
15 db
Response
Signals (black negative)
Signals to Viewfinder
Gain
x 175/e"
Weight
A -C Power:
-
175 watts
10
NOIE: For specifications on Master Monitor, Color Monitor, Colorplexer and
Power Supply see separate catalog description of these items.
Power (from power supplies):
Heaters, Blowers
280 volts
360 ma
Supply Voltage
A -C Power Input
Input:
Horizontal Drive from Processing Amp -51 Ohm
D -C
D -C
Current
280 volts, 125 ma
360 volts, 65 ma
24 volts, d -c
1
1- 6AS7-G
1-7TP4
1-M45G-11.5
1-GV6A-1450
PROCESSING AMPLIFIER:
9 -6CL6
9 -12AT7
3- 12AU7 -A
1- 6BX7 -GT
1- 12BH7 -A
16- 6BQ7 -A
9- 12AX7 -A
50/60 cycles, single phase, 117 volts, 58 watts
3
4 -6AL5
-6U8 -A
PROCESSING AMPLIFIER:
Input:
Video (led, blue, green and test)
Impedance (red, blue, green and test)
Horizontal Drive (high impedance)
Vertical Drive (high impedance)
Blanking Pulse (high impedance)
Calibration Pulse (high impedance)
FOCUS CURRENT REGULATOR:
0.3 volt peak -to -peak
75 ohm 15%
1.5 to 5 volts peak -to -peak
1.5 to 5 volts peak -to -peak
1.5 to 5 volts peak -to -peak
15 kc sq. wave 0.7 volt
peak -to -peak
2- 68X7 -GT
C
OLOR PI. EXER:
10-6AU6-A
2-6AH6-WA
3-12AU7-A
3-6BK7-B
4-6AS6 (Stock #204603)
Output:
Video to Colorplexer (red, blue and green)
0.7 volt peak -to -peak
75 ohms
0.7 volt peak -to -peak
Video to Monitor CRO
Impedance
(Sending end 75 ohms, receiving end unterminated)
0.7 volt peak -to -peak
Video to Monitor Kinescope
75 ohms
Impedance
Horizontal Drive:
8.5 microseconds ±5%
Width
3.5 volts peak -to -peak
Amplitude
75 ohms
Impedance
-6CW4 (Nuvistor)
1
1- 12AX7 -A
2-OA2
2-6BX7-GT
1-5726
1-6X4
1-6BC4
Impedance
Vertical Drive:
Width
Amplitude
Impedance
Blanking Pulse:
Width
Amplitude
Impedance
Calibration Pulse:
Width
Amplitude
APERTURE COMPENSATOR:
1
Equal to input pulse width
0.7 volt peak -to -peak -!-1%
1
-6 U 8 -A
AUTOMATIC CARRIER BALANCE:
2 -6AL5
i
-- 6A W 8 -A
1- 6AU6 -A
1- 6AN8-A
FOCUS VOLTAGE REGULATOR:
4 -6CW4
800 microseconds ±20%
3.5 volts peak -to -peak
75 ohms
Equal to input pulse width +1%
2 volts peak -to -peak
75 ohms
-6BQ7A
1
1
-7119
-6201
Overall Mechanical
Camero
Length
Width
Height
Weight
Camera
Viewfinder
44"
21"
341/e"
141/2"
13tí6"
111 /e"
Control Panel
18"
131/4"
8"
Impedance
Low
18 lbs.
45 lbs.
265 lbs.*
Twenty Cycle Staircase Voltage to Master Monitor:
22 volts peak -to -peak
Amplitude (maximum)
* Camera weight less objective lenses, panning and focus handles.
High
Impedance
NOTE: The TK -41C Camera equipment is also available for operation on 625 line, 50 -field standards
and from 50- cycle, 115-volt or 230 -volt power source.
- - --
CAMERAS
SPECIFICATION5(Continued)
Equipment Supplied
CONSOLE -MOUNTED
CONTROL
Qty.
1
MI Number
40534
1
40501 -A
40502
40520 -A
40833 -1
40833-2
40535
1
40524-B
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
I
2
1
2
2
1
1
40541
40829
26550 -1
26550 -2
26550-3
40802 -A1
40802 -A2
40209 -C
40414
40416 -A
26136 -C
26544
40226 -D
26786
26787
26579-B
-- -- - -26655
26667
40890
40891
26084 -B
26083 -A
26082 -A
40868 -2
40834
26759-41
26759-42
26646
26647
40824
RACK -MOUNTED
CONTROL
Description
Color Camera (less Image Orthicons)
Viewfinder (including Kinescope)
Hood
Processing Amplifier (less Gamma Correctors)
Gamma Corrector (0.7)
Gamma Corrector (1.0)
Camera Control Panel
Focus Current Regulator
Focus Voltage Regulator
Neutral Density hivers, Set or
lens, 50mm Objective
Lens, 90mm Objective
Lens, 135mm Objective
Field Lens (for 50mm Objective Lens)
Field Lens (for 90mm and 135mm Objective Lens)
TX-1D Colorplexer
Aperture Compensator
Automatic Carrier Balance Control
TM -6C Master Monitor
Sync Interlock Relay (for TM -6C)
TM -21D Color Monitor
Console Housing (for TM -6C)
Console Housing (for MI-40520-A and 40523)
Blower (for TM -6C)
Rock Mounting Desk for Control Panel
Rack Mount Adaptor for TM -6C
Qty.
1
1
1
1
3
1
-
1
40541
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
_
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
1
1
1
i
1
Adjustable Transformer
Transformer Mounting Plate (for MI-26646)
Cradle Head
40861
TD -9C Motor Driven Pedestal
40871
Video Level Control Panel
Table Assembly for MI-40871
NOTE: The following bulk cable is required and should be ordered separately
to meet individual installation requirements:
83 -A
RG -11 /U 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable
RG -59/U 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable
75
13380 -12
12- Conductor Shielded Cable
13380-8
8- Conductor Shielded Cable
1
40535
40524 -B
1
Kinescope Tube, Type 10SP4 (for TM -6C)
CRO Tube, Type 5ABP1 for TM -6C)
Image Orthicon Tube, Type 4415 _
Image Orthicon Tube, Type 4416
WP -16B Power Supply
WP -16B Centering Current Sub- chassis Unit
WP -16B Unregulated High Voltage Sub- chassis Unit
Camera Cable, 50 -ft. (with Connectors)....
Cable Harness and Barrier Strips
Power Cable
Power Cable
1
1
1
1
- - --
1
1
40501 -A
40502
40520 -A
40833 -1
40833 -2
1
1
Rack Extension Kit
MI Number
40534
40829
26550-1
26550 -2
26550-3
40802 -Al
40802 -A2
40209-C
40414
40416-A
26136-C
26544
40226 -D
- - -40,315
26526
40408
26655
26667
40890
40891
26084 -B
26083 -A
26082 -A
40868 -2
40834
26759 -41
26759-42
26646
26647
40824
40861
40871
40872
83 -A
75
13380 -12
13380.8
Accessory Equipment
Neutral Density Slide Mechanism for
Spare Video Preamplifier for TK -41
Pulse
Ml -40528
MI. 40800 -A
MI -26886
Field Lens Test Pattern Jig
100 Ft. Camera Cable
200 Ft. Camera Cable
Right End Panel for Console Housing
Left Side Cover for Console Housing
Right Side Cover for Console Housing
Single Headset
Double Headset
Interphone Connection Unit (Transistorized)
Interphone Retardation Coil
Mounting Plate for Interphone Connection Unit
Mounting Panel for Retardation Coil
Gamma Corrector (0.5)
MI -26158
MI- 26788-1
MI. 26788.2
MI-26789-1
MI- 26789-2
Ml -11743
Ml -11744
MI -11784
MI-11737
Ml -11735
MI. 11736-A
MI.40833 -3
EIA
EIA
EIA
EIA
EIA
TK -41C
Delay Line
TA -4A Pulse Distribution Amplifier
Left End Panel for Console Housing
Linearity Test Chart
Resolution Test Chart
Registration Test Chart
Linear Gray Scale
Logarithimic Gray Scale Chart
Type BR -84D Cabinet Rack
"WA -9A Calibration Pulse Generator
"WA-1E Color Bar Generator
WA -7C Linearity Checker
*
MI -40873
MI- 40868-3
MI-40868-4
MI- 26822 -1
MI- 26822 -2
MI-26822-3
MI. 26822.4
MI. 26822 -5
MI- 30951 -D84
MI -26070
MI-34001 -F
MI- 34017 -B
If not already available, one each of the above starred equipments
necessary for operation of the TK -41C Color Studio Camera Chain.
:s
CAMERAS
3-inch Image Orthicon TV Camera
TYPE TK -14
FEATURES
New, advanced yoke design obtains higher
resolution from image orthicon
Peak electrical focus maintained by
stabilized I.O. control voltages
High quality viewfinder with 7 -inch
aluminized kinescope
Thermostatically controlled forced
ventilation of coil and tube
Protection circuit for deflection failurs
"Overscan" switch for warm -up
and rehearsal
Transistor amplifier intercom system
Short "set -up" time; fast, accurate foc Jsing
Plug -in blower, pre -amplifier, and
yoke assemblies
DESCRIPTION
The RCA TK -14 Image Orthicon Television Camera is de-
signed as an all- purpose monochrome camera head and
viewfinder which can be used for either Feld or studio
applications. The camera features a 3 -inch, Type 5820A,
Image Orthicon Tube and improved circuitry which afford
higher horizontal and vertical resolution capability. Excellent video signals under normal lighting conditions (25
to 150 -foot candles) are obtained, and good pick -ups with
minimum incident illumination of 0.5 foot candle permit
use of the TK -14 at sporting events, night clubs, and
other pick -up points where lighting conditions are poor.
A 7 -inch aluminized kinescope tube and high quality view-
finder enables the cameraman to view the scene.
Stability and flexibility in performance are stressed in the
design of the TK -14. New circuitry affording greater focus
current regulation, target, dynode and image section stabilization with noticeably better picture quality are incorporated in the new camera and camera control. Fringe
field effects are greatly reduced through inclusion of an
electrostatic shield over the image section of the orthicon
tube. A protection circuit for deflection failure, and
thermostatically controlled forced ventilation of coil and
tube are features of the camera.
A new, modern appearance is featured by the TK -14
Camera. The camera and viewfinder are finished in an
attractive silver gray textured vinyl, with the exception of
the camera side doors which are finished in a contrasting
light blue. A dome type tally light is mounted at the
top of the viewfinder for clear visibility from all directions.
intercom system is built into the new
camera. Two intercom circuits are provided -one each for
engineering and production use. Each circuit has individual
volume controls.
A transistorized
"Inside out" accessibility is retained in the TK -14. The
mechanical layout and design of both camera and viewfinder afford greater ease of servicing and maintenance.
Plug -in blower, preamplifiers, and yoke assemblies permit
quick spare interchange. Short "set -up" time, fast, accurate
focusing, and convenient "overscan" switch for warm -up
and rehearsal are operational features of the camera
chain.
CAMERAS
Camera
The camera comprises a mounting
for the image orthicon
pickup tube together with its focus, deflection and beam alignment coils, complete horizontal and vertical deflection
circuits, a video pre -amplifier, target heater, blower duct,
yoke assembly, and an optical system consisting of a
turret with four lens positions and means for adjusting
optical focus and iris openings. It is entirely self -contained
except for a B power supply and certain electrical controls
which are located, for operating convenience, at the
camera control. All electrical connections are made through
a single cable and plug which carry input power and
sync generator signals to the camera, and video output
and control circuits from it.
Physically the camera is divided into three main compartments. In the center compartment is located the pickup
tube with its deflection, focus and alignment coils. The
two side compartments, accessible by opening the side
doors, contain the video and deflection amplifiers respectively. On the front end of the camera is the lens turret,
and on the rear are some of the electrical controls and
the control handle for rotating the turret. The optical focus
control is located on the right hand side of the camera
(from the rear or operating position). This focus control
and the turret handle are normally the only two controls
which require the attention of the cameraman during a
television program.
New TK -14 Monochrome TV Camera features easy access to circuits
and controls. Camera is mounted on TD -10 Hydraulic Pedestal.
The TK -14 Studio Camera Chain includes the Camera,
Viewfinder, Studio Camera Control, TM -6C Master Monitor,
Orbiter
Generator and WP -16B Power Supply with Centering Current Unit and Unregulated High Voltage Unit. This equipment is designed to mount in a standard 13 -inch console
housing and standard racks.
Focus Current Regulated Supply, Electromagnetic
The TK -14 Field Camera Chain includes the Camera, Viewfinder, Field Camera Control, Focus Current Regulated
Supply, Electromagnetic Orbiter Generator, Field Case in
which the focus current regulator and orbiter generator
are to be mounted, and TY-31 Field Power Supply. This
equipment is designed as a portable system with all units
in field cases for ease of transporting.
Both systems are supplied with lens, cables and tubes, as
required. The camera can be mounted on studio or field
type tripods, dollies or pedestals.
A bracket containing seven controls and switches is attached to the camera frame at the base of the deflection
chassis. The blower -motor assembly is located at the bottom front portion of the camera under the yoke assembly.
A 24 -pin connector and two sets of communication and
program sound jacks are within easy reach on the bottom
of the camera housing. Two tally lights at the front and
one at the rear of the camera in conjunction with the tally
light dome atop the viewfinder and the tally light in the
kinescope mask are used as "on- the -air" indicators. Inter-
connecting plug and latch locks are incorporated in the
camera to accommodate the viewfinder which mounts
directly on top of the camera.
Optical focusing is obtained by moving the tube and its
associated yoke coils. The complete yoke assembly is supported on a ball bearing slide mechanism which is an
integral part of the assembly. Although rigidly fastened to
the frame when in position, the entire assembly is removable in a few moments for servicing because it forms a
plug -in unit. This suspension is smoothly driven through its
entire travel for optical focusing by 21/4 turns of a focus
knob. The knob remains in place when the side door is
CAMERAS
Hinged doors permit complete access to camera and viewfinder.
opened. This simple yet rugged drive mechanism imparts
a non -linear motion so that relatively great image orthicon
motion per degree of knob rotation is obtained for close ups. Conversely, vernier motion is provided near infinity
focus, where rapid motion would make accurate focusing
difficult.
The improved yoke provides better shading, less geometric
distortion and improved shielding. To improve the camera
resolution capabilities an electrostatic shield has been
incorporated in the yoke to minimize the degradation
from deflection fields upon the image section of the orthicon tube. A special wrap -around mu -metal shield extends
from the image end past the alignment coils for complete
shielding against external magnetic fields.
The yoke assembly is provided with a toroidal coil which
is connected to an orbiting generator located at the
control position. The current through this coil creates a
slight displacement of the focus coil and magnetic field
at the image end. The direction of displacement rotates
to keep the electron image at the target in a constant
orbiting motion to avoid burn -in of the image orthicon.
The rate of orbiting is sufficiently slow and slight to be
virtually unnoticeable. This feature prolongs the useful life
of image orthicons to reduce operating costs.
Simplified Alignment
The alignment coil assembly incorporated in the camera
comprises two pairs of coils in space quadrature so that
independent control of currents in the two pairs of coils
will produce a correcting cross field in any direction required. In this system, no mechanical adjustment of the
coil is required; it is rigidly mounted. The alignment
procedure involves the simultaneous adjustment of two
potentiometer controls which determine the currents in the
two sets of coils. In order to simplify the alignment procedure, an auxiliary orthicon focus control has been
included in the camera.
Vertical deflection incorporates feedback and phase correction for excellent linearity and stability without need
for linearity adjustments. Target blanking insertion is at
low impedance to eliminate crosstalk problems. Horizontal
deflection has excellent linearity, single knob linearity
control, for ease of adjustment, better stability, and freedom from transients by an improved push -pull type circuit
and a novel ferrite core output transformer.
A seven microsecond return time insures good operation
even with the extreme delay conditions associated with
1000 foot camera cable operation. Adequate and symmetrical centering controls are available. Both deflection
circuits can be switched from normal scan to 10 percent
overscan to guarantee against burned target areas during warm up, rehearsals, and stand -by while maintaining
linearity and aspect ratio.
Thermostatically Controlled Cooling
Thermal control of the operating temperature for the
image orthicon tube is incorporated in the TK -14. The
"plug -in" blower which is easily removed from the camera is cycled by a thermostat imbedded in the mask
on the face of the pickup tube. The output of the blower
couples to a gas mask type hose which directs cooling
air through the air passages along the surface of the
tube and between the coils. This assures proper operating
temperature for stable performance and longer tube life.
Provisions are also made for continuous operation of the
blower and the target heater to meet extreme conditions.
Protection for the image
the use of a protection
when there is a loss of
failure, or failure of the
orthicon tube is assured through
circuit which cuts off the tube
driving signals, deflection circuit
activating relay.
Image Orthicon Stability
stability of the output signal of the image orthicon
tube has been greatly improved by incorporating new
highly regulated voltage sources. A new subchassis has
been added in the camera to supply exceedingly stable
1300 volts for the dynode multipliers and -600 volts
for the photo cathode and G -6. These circuits utilize
a
comparatively new device in the form of a hydrogen gas
The
TK14 high voltage regulation circuit utilizing gas discharge tube
provides improved image orthicon stability.
filled metal tube which
is capable of precise regulation
of high voltages. This tube operates on a gas discharge
principle.
Further
picture improvement is achieved by stabilized
voltages and currents supplied from the new Focus Current
Regulated Supply. This supply maintains the focus current
within 0.2 percent of its optimum value over a wide temperature range. The same unit provides a high stabilized
voltage source for the G -4, target and beam setting electrode G -1 of the image orthicon tube.
Extra Features
maximum picture sharpness and improved corner
resolution, a focus modulation circuit is an important feature of the TK -14 camera. This circuit provides low impedance feed of horizontal and vertical parabolic wave shapes in a 4 3 aspect ratio to the orthicon wall to provide continuous beam focus over the usable target area.
Blemishes inherent on the surface of the signal multiplier
of the tube are defocused and are made to disappear
without sacrifice of resolution.
For
The
decelerator control
0 -120 volts for accurate
is
continuously
variable
from
"port hole" control. Image ac-
celerator control provides "S- distortion" correction. Vertical deflection reversal is provided by a switch for special
effects applications. Switch is made at the same time to
a preset centering potentiometer to insure operation with
the same target area. Horizontal deflection reversal is
possible in that two coaxial leads feed the yoke so that
a simple change of the yoke connections at the yoke plug
will permit, for example, mirror image operation.
CAMERAS
A multiplier video gain control allows a cure in the case
of dynode overload. A line voltage tap switch compensates for line voltage drop associated with different cable
lengths. An elapsed time indicator records hours of tube
-1110111111111111114
operation conveniently.
The video amplifier is a plug -in unit with all power con-
nections made through a single plug and receptacle and
with three small coaxial connectors for the input, main
output, and viewfinder output signal connections. The
amplifier is mounted on rubber to minimize the effects of
vibration and shock.
uniform to 8 megacycles and performance at low frequencies is free of streaking. Two
stages of cathode high peaking eliminate overshoot and
smear by very accurately compensating for the amplifier
input loss of high frequencies while reducing microphonics
associated with conventional high peaking. A separate output of this amplifier provides signal for the viewfinder.
Ample gain insures a bright viewfinder picture with even
a low -limit camera tube. Shading signals are introduced
in the camera amplifier thus allowing shading in the viewfinder picture -a feedback pair in the output stage adds
viewfinder isolation, sending -end cable termination, and
provides linearity and stability.
Amplitude response
is
Electronic Viewfinder
The Electronic Viewfinder is a picture monitor
using a
seven -inch aluminized kinescope tube (RCA -7TP4) which
enables the cameraman to view the scene. The design
of this unit permits ease of access to the circuits and components, without interrupting operation. The kinescope is
enclosed in a magnetic shield which minimizes stray fields
and also serves as a light shield around the tube. The
video amplifier includes adjustable blanking width controls to match blanking used in the camera control, thus
eliminating confusion in determining the actual edges of
the transmitted picture. The Viewfinder unit literally plugs
into the top of the camera thus forming a complete operating unit. The front is easily detached for kinescope removal. A detachable viewing hood may be rigidly mounted
to the mask assembly to prevent stray light from striking the
face of the kinescope. The number of exposed operating
controls has been reduced to three (contrast, brightness,
and focus) with rim -type control knobs protruding through
the rounded corners of the kinescope mask assembly.
Variable -width blanking permits adjustment of the viewfinder picture for accurate framing. Horizontal deflection
is highly efficient; vertical deflection is a duplicate of the
camera circuit; the video amplifier is wide band; and a
driven clamp provides accurate d -c restoration. The viewfinder is attached to the camera by a two- finger, one -hand
type release mechanism.
Focus Current Regulated Supply and Orbiter Generator
shown mounted in Auxiliary Field Case.
Focus Current Regulated Supply
The Focus Current Regulated Supply is a precisely regu-
lated power source for the yoke focus coil and G -4, target,
and beam setting electrode G -1 of the image orthicon
tube. The focus current is adjustable and a metering jack is
incorporated to permit the use of a Ml- 21200 -C Test Meter.
Pin jacks are available for circuit test and voltage measurements. A hinged subchassis is utilized to permit ease
of servicing.
for rack mounting. However, it is
Field Case along with the
in
the
Auxiliary
mounted
easily
when
with
the field camera chains.
used
orbiter generator
This unit is designed
Studio Camera Control
The Studio Camera Control enables the video operator
to monitor and control the quality of the picture signal
produced by the studio camera. It is a desk -type console section with a TM -6C Camera Monitor mounted in
the upper part, and the control chassis mounted in the
compartment below. The camera monitor has a ten -inch
picture tube for displaying the picture and a five -inch
oscilloscope tube which reproduces the picture signal
waveform. Controls for gain and black level setting are
brought out on the monitor front panel.
The major operating controls have been reduced to three:
Beam, Orthicon Focus, and Image Focus. These are
equipped with standard, medium sized knobs which match
those used on the associated Master Monitor. Less frequently used controls are grouped under a hinged cover
over the control panel. The lucite panel is coated with dull
black paint and utilizes edge lighting which illuminates
designations but does not produce any stray light.
CAMERAS
regulated voltage, capable of supplying current loads of
up to 1600 milliamperes. This is sufficient for an entire
monochrome camera chain including the master monitor.
Centering current and unregulated voltage are supplied
by means of subchassis units which are powered by separate, non -regulating secondary windings of the power
transformer. These units are required when the WP -16B
is used with the TK -14 camera chain.
The Centering Current Subchassis Unit
is used for supplying centering current to live camera and master monitor.
It contains two transistors and associated circuits mounted
on a small sub -assembly. The current is adjustable between
300 and 1200 ma. by means of a control located on the
front panel of the power supply. The Unregulated Voltage
Subchassis Unit is used for the deflection circuits of the
camera and master monitor which require a higher volt-
Studio Camera Control showing chassis
and control panel.
The control chassis contains the necessary circuits for ampli-
fying the video signal, establishing black level, mixing in
a sawtooth correcting signal, adding picture synchronizing
signal and providing three separate outputs. In order to
provide more comprehensive control of the picture quality
an arrangement has been included for controlling the
non -linearity of the video -amplifier.
age than that provided by the regulated voltage output.
The WP -16B Power Supply is factory wired for an unregulated d -c voltage output of 400 volts. Taps are pro-
vided on the power transformer which can be connected
to provide output voltage of 360, 380, 420 and 460 volts.
The ripple content of the unregulated output is only 5
volts peak -to -peak and the output voltage is maintained
within one percent for a fifteen percent change in line
voltage. When the unregulated voltage sub -chassis unit
is used, the capacity of the regulated output is reduced
to 1350 milliamperes.
Type TM -6C Master Monitor
The Type TM -6C Master Monitor provides in a compact
form a complete monitoring unit for the observation of
the TK -14 camera chain's video signals. It is used to show
both picture (kinescope) and waveform (oscilloscope) monitoring of signals at any stage of transmission. Careful
scrutinization of a number of details of the video signal
may be performed which will aid in maintaining proper
level as well as obtaining registration during set -up.
The unit employs a special ten -inch aluminized, straight
gun, electro- statically focused kinescope for direct picture
monitoring and a five -inch, flat faced, cathode ray tube
for waveform presentation. The primary operating controls are located on the front panel. Other frequently used
controls are mounted under a cover at the top of the
panel. Controls used only for initial set -up are mounted
on the left side of the chassis. All monitor components
are readily accessible for servicing.
Semiconductor Power Supply
The WP -16B Semiconductor Regulated Power Supply is a
rugged, high -efficiency, lightweight source of precisely
Portable Field Camera Control
for use in remote pick -ups is
contained in a suitcase unit for easy carrying, and enables the video operator to monitor and control the quality
of the picture signal produced by the field camera. On the
front panel are located two cathode ray tubes which serve
as picture quality indicators. A seven -inch aluminized kinescope is used as a picture monitor, and a three -inch CRO
tube is used as a waveform monitor.
The Field Camera Control
An improved feature of the Field Camera Control is the
sub -assembly, plug -in, r -f type high voltage supply. It is
a completely separate unit which receives only its B-}- and
filament voltages from the camera control, and in turn supplies the +1500 volt focus potential and 10 kv ultor
voltage for the kinescope as well as the -1500 volt cathode potential for the CRO tube. This extremely compact,
efficient, and well -shielded unit provides stable ultor and
focus voltages and ensures constant focus and deflection
on the kinescope screen.
CAMERAS
Built -in Master Monitor Facilities
A seven -inch kinescope in the Field Camera Control pro-
vides the control operator an excellent monitor to evaluate
picture quality. Appropriate circuits to obtain the maximum performance from this tube have been included. Its
high contrast and brightness provide a picture which
easily observed under outdoor daylight conditions.
is
The waveform monitor, or CRO, features a highly stable
sweep circuit which operates at either one -half of hori-
zontal scanning frequency or one -half of vertical scanning
frequency at the operator's choice. Indirect edge lighting
is used with a calibrated lucite scale over the face of the
CRO tube for easy and accurate measurements. When
sync is mixed in the field camera control, a complete presentation of the CRO is available which enables the operator to set the proper levels.
Improved circuitry assures a video -frequency response that
in no way limits the system. New sine -wave clamping employed at three places effectively establishes black level
and guarantees gray scale rendition without introducing
high- frequency unbalance to damage the blanking waveform. A regenerative type blanking circuit stabilizes
blanking insertion. Fixed blanking set -up adds a controlled amount of "blacker- than -black" blanking. Ability to
"stretch" the whites or grays is sometimes helpful in improving inferior pictures or producing special effects in
contrast. Two "black- white" stretch circuit switches permit
selection of four different conditions of gray scale alteration while keeping overall video amplitude constant.
From the output stage of the video amplifier are available
two identical isolated video outputs which operate at the
standard level of one volt of picture signal. Monitoring is
direct from the outgoing line. Sync can be mixed in the
camera control and thus makes available a composite
signal at each output.
The mechanical construction of the Field Camera Control
has been designed to realize the benefits of sub -assembly
construction as far as possible. A small blower provides
forced cooling to the unit. Accessibility is excellent, thereby making servicing easy.
"target -set" button is provided to automatically reduce
the target potential by two volts as a means for rapidly
setting the target two volts above cut -off. Both vertical and
horizontal sawtooth shading signals of either polarity are
available. Video response is compensated by a "3- position"
A
switch for various cable lengths in common use.
Circuitry is provided to allow use of the existing intercommunication lines in the camera cable to feed the driving currents to the electro- magnetic orbiter coil located
in the camera, when the orbiting generator is plugged into
the camera control. This does not affect normal operation
of the intercommunication circuits. A switch on the camera
Chain showing Field Camera Control on table,
Supply and Field Case containing Focus Current
Regulator and Electro- magnetic Orbiter Generator beside camera and
viewfinder mounted on field tripod and dolly.
TK -14 Field Camera
TY -31A Field Power
control is provided to stop the orbiting motion when a
perfectly stationary image is required, as in the case of
superimpositions. A tally light provides a warning indication when the orbiter is turned off.
Auxiliary Field Case
Auxiliary Field Case is designed to accept the Orbiter
Generator and Focus Current Regulator Supply. All cables
and connectors required within the case for interconnecting
the two units are supplied. No special wiring is necessary.
All circuits required for a field installation are brought
out to connectors on the rear of the case.
The
Portable Field Power Supply
The Field Power Supply, Type TY-31A,
is a portable unit
designed to supply all the d -c current required by the
TK -14 Field Camera, Viewfinder, and Field Camera Control in one camera chain. A blower cooling system direct
an air stream directly over the tubes. An important feature
the broad range of output current values at which regulated voltage may be obtained. The addition of a relay
to withdraw a series regulator under light load provides
u regulating range from 1.25a at 285 volts down to about
400 ma. The low end of the output range is especially
useful when servicing only one unit of the camera chain,
in which case the current drain is low.
is
CAMERAS
SPECIFICATIONS
General*
Mechanical Specifications
Type of Reproduction
Number of Scanning Lines
Frame Repetition Rate
Field Repetition Rate...
Line Repetition Rate
Monochrome
525 or 625
30 or 25 per sec.
60 or 50 per sec.
15,750 or 15,625 per sec.
0.7 volt, peak- to-peak, non -composite nominal
1.0 volt, peak -to -peak, composite, nominal
1.0 volt, peak -to -peak, non -composite, optional
1.4 volt, peak -to -peak, composite, optional
Picture Signal
Viewfinder Kinescope Size
Input Signals:
Horizontal Drive
Vertical Drive
EIA Blanking
7"
4.0
4.0
4.0
EIA Sync
4.0
±0.5
±0.5
±0.5
±0.5
volts,
volts,
volts,
volts,
peak -to -peak,
peak -to -peak,
peak -to -peak,
peak -to -peak,
Input Termination Impedance
negative'
negative'
negative'
negative'
75 ohms
Output Signals:
Studio Camera Video Outputs
3, non-composite
(Sync may be added to one output)
Field Camera Video Outputs
2, non-composite
(Sync may be added to both outputs)
75 ohms
Impedance of Output Terminations
Power Requirements:
Studio Camera Chain
A -C Power
115 volts, 60 cycle chain
230 volts, 50 cycle chain
D -C Power (from camera chain supplies)
Regulated +280 volts
Unregulated +400 volts
960 watts
960 watts
1,290 ma
160 ma
75 ma
1000 ma
Current
Centering Current -5.0 volts (approx.)
Focus
Field Camera Chain
A -C Power
115 volts, 50/60 cycle chain
230 volts, 50 cycle chain
D -C Power (from TY -31)
Regulated +280 volts
Unregulated +400 volts
1,650 watts
1,650 watts
1,240 ma
160 ma
75 ma
1000 ma
Current
Centering Current -5.0 volts (approx.)
Focus
Picture Quality:
Limiting Horizontal Resolution
650 TV lines, minimum in center
Signal -to -Noise Ratio
Nominal 30 -33 db peak -to -peak
signal /RMS noise for bandwidth of 4.5 mc
Blanking Signal Overshoots
Not in excess of EIA specifications
Overall Frequency Response
with 100 ft. Camera Cable
±0.5 db to 7 mc;
down not more than 3 db at 8 mc
Scanning Linearity
Within ±1%
Overscan Amplitude
10%
Orbiting Speed
1
RPM
Operational Specifications:
Pedestal Range...
0 to 50% clipping of signal
Gamma Correction
Separate black and white gamma switches
Camera Cable Compensation
Adjustable to compensate for a
maximum length of 1000 ft. of camera cable
Tube Complement
Camera:
4 -6AH6,
1
-6CU6,
3- 12AT7, 1- 5820 -A,
1
1- 6BQ6 -GT
-600R,
Viewfinder:
1
Studio
1
1
1
1
-7TP4,
3 -6A15,
Current Regulator Supply:
Camera Control:
-6AG7,
4 -6AL5,
1
1
1
1
-OA2, 1- 6A57G, -6S4,
4- 12AT7,
Focus
1
-6X8,
-5687, -6AQ5,
-654,
-6AS6, -6U8, 3- 12AU7, 1- 1300R,
1
1
2 -5763, 2 -1X2A,
-CL6,
1- 6BQ6 -GT,
2 -12AU7
-OA2,
6 -6AH6,
2 -12AU7
1- 6AU5 -GT, 8- 12AT7,
Field Camera Control: 4 -1X2A, 2 -6BQ6, -6S4, 3 -5763, 8 -6AH6,
1- 6BQ7A, 10- 12AT7, -3KP1, 5 -6A15, -6C16,
12AU7,
1 -7TP4,
1- 6AU5 -GT, 1 -6L6, 2 -991
1
1
*
34
1
6-
See separate catalog description for specifications and tube complement on master monitor and power supplies.
Dimensions
(tbs.)
271/2" long, 16" wide, 141/2" high
78
23'/2" long, 10'/2" wide, 81/2" high 31
Camera (overall)
Viewfinder (overall)
Focus Current Regulator
Supply
Orbiter Generator
Studio Camera Control
Field Camera Control
Field Power Supply
Field Case for Focus Current,
Regulator and Orbiter
19" wide, 3'/2" high, 10' /e" deep
19" wide, 31/2" high, 101/4" deep
26" long, 113/e" wide, 233/8" high
271/2" long, 8'/2" wide, 171/2" high
26" long, 81/2" wide, 18'/2" high
27'/2" long, 81/2" wide, 19" high
12
5
27
67
58
20
Ordering Information
TK -14
Field Camera Equipment:
115 V., 60 Cycle
230
Chain
Qty. MI Number
Description
Qty.
26014
Image Orthicon Camera
26024
Camera Viewfinder
26064
Field Camera Control
26091
Field Power Supply, TY-31
26093
Focus Current Regulated Supply
26853
Orbiter Generator
26294
Auxiliary Field Case
Cathode Roy Tube, RCA 3KP1
26650
Kinescope Tube, RCA 71P4
26666
Image Orthicon, RCA 5820 -A
26656 -A
43201
Set of Interconnecting Cables _
Lens, 50mm, f /1.8
826160
826161
Lens, 85mm, f /1.9
826162
Lens, 135mm, f/3.5
26725-E5 Camera Cable, 50 feet
26725-E6 Camera Cable, 100 feet
26725 -E7 Camera Cable, 200 feet
26372
Set of Call letter Panels
26203 -A
Camera Cradle Head
26046
Metal Tripod, TD -11A
TK -14 Studio Camera Equipment:
115 V., 60 Cycle
230
Chain
Qty. MI Number
Description
Qty.
26014
Image Orthicon Camera
26024
Camera Viewfinder
26074
Camera Control Chassis
26136 -C Master Monitor, TM -6C
Power Supply, WP -16B
26084 -B
26083 -A Centering Current Sub Chassis Unit
26082 -A Unregulated High Voltage
Sub Chassis Unit
26093
Focus Current Regulated Supply
26786
Console Housing, 13 -inch
26579 -B
Blower for Master Monitor Housing
26667
Cathode Ray Tube, RCA 5ABP1
1
Kinescope Tube, 10SP4
26655
26656 -A Image Orthicon, RCA 5820 -A _.
26746
Set of Interconnecting Cables
826160
Lens, 50mm, f /1.8
826161
lens, 85mm, f /1.9
826162
lens, 135mm, f/3.5
26725 -E9 Camera Cable, 50 feet
26853
Orbiter Generator
26372
Set of Call Letter Panels
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V., 50 Cycle
Chain
MI Number
556014
556024
556064
N26091
556093
556853
26294
26650
26666
26656-A
43201
826160
826161
826162
26725 -E5
26725 -E6
26725 -E7
26372
26203 -A
26046
V., 50 Cycle
Chain
MI Number
556014
556024
556074
N26136 -C
26094 -B
26083 -A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
26082 -A
556093
26786
556579 -B
26667
26655
26656 -A
26746
826160
826161
826162
26725 -E5
556853
26372
Accessories
Shock Mount for Field Camera Control and Power Supply
Shock Mount for Camera and Viewfinder
Lens,
lens,
3 -6CW4, 3 -7119
1- 6BQ7A,
Weight
Unit
81/2",
35mm,
Lens, 13 ",
Lens, 17 ",
Lens, 25 ",
f/3.9
f/3.3
f/5
f/5
f/5
Orbiter Interconnecting Cable
Neutral Density Filter Holder
Spare Video Pre -Amplifier
Spare
'
Yoke Assembly
Pulse widths as specified by EIA in RS-170. Terminals
arranged for loop through connections.
..
Ml-26511 -A1
MI.26511 -3
MI- 26550-4
MI- 26550.9
MI- 26590.14
MI. 26590 -15
MI. 26590 -8
MI -13333
MI -26847
MI -26153
MI- 26747-B
for signals are
CAMERAS
Viewfinder Vidicon
TV Camera
STUDIO TYPE TK -15B
FEATURES
Precision vidicon camera with integrated
7 -inch electronic viewfinder
Low -noise preamplifier, variable gamma
and aperture correction assure excellent
picture quality
Reliable picture performance at all times
by feedback stabilized black level, video,
and deflection amplifiers
Electromagnetic vidicon alignment, amplifier test pulse and local camera controls
simplify setup and maintenance
Output amplifier provides three sending
end terminated video signals
Precision focus mechanism with optical
focus over full range in less than one turn
of knob
Automatic Sensitivity Control available
Transistor amplifier intercom system
DESCRIPTION
The TK -15B Vidicon Camera has
many applications
in
both television stations and closed- circuit installations. As
a source of live programming in television stations, this
new vidicon camera is extremely useful for picking up
scenes on which adequate lighting levels (approximately
200 foot -candles) can be maintained. For example, a
single TK -15B camera can be utilized for live newscasts,
simple product demonstrations and flip -chart commercials.
Under adequate lighting conditions, excellent picture
available from the vidicon tube. Usable pictures
can be obtained with lighting levels of 50 foot -candles or
less, depending upon the picture quality requirements of
the application. The economy of operation inherent in the
vidicon makes the TK -15B an excellent investment for the
quality
is
uses described.
Design of the
TK -15B
meets professional
requirements
in every way. Mechanically,
the camera is designed for
rugged use and utmost accessibility to components. Electrically advanced circuit techniques, a reduced tube
complement and simplified operating controls have been
introduced without compromise to performance. Signal to -noise ratio, gray scale rendition and detail resolution
are excellent.
Each TK -15B includes two transistorized intercom circuits,
for engineering and production use. Each circuit provides
high level voice communications between camera operator,
the camera control operator and program director or
other operating personnel. Variable volume controls allow
individual adjustment of sound level output.
CAMERAS
BASIC CAMERA CHAIN
WITH LOCAL CAMERA CONTROLS
TK -15B
REMOTE CONTROL AND
MASTER MONITOR (OPTIONAL)
Camera and rack-mounted equipments compr:se the basic camera chain. Optional
facilities are mounted in standard control console at the right.
remote -control
Local operating controls (gain, pedestal, beam and electrical focus) are
available at the rear of the camera, where they are convenient to the
operator for setup and maintenance.
The TK -15B camera and 7 -inch electronic viewfinder con-
stitute a single, self- contained chassis equipped with a
4 -lens turret and all operating controls (gain, pedestal,
beam and electrical focus). A standard camera cable connects the camera with the output amplifier which may be
mounted in a standard cabinet rack. These units, plus a
WP -16 Power Supply, comprise the basic camera chain.
Operating control of all electrical adjustments including
an ASC "on -off" switch is available by means of optional
remote camera control panels. The MI- 26213 -A Remote
Control Panel may be mounted along with a master monitor in a standard 131/4 -inch television console housing or
cabinet rack. Each panel includes an ASC "on -off"
switch as well as gain, focus, pedestal and beam controls.
Rugged, vertical plane chassis construction has been featured in the TK -15B camera design. Hinged doors on
either side of the camera open downward to expose the
camera interior for inspection and maintenance. The video
amplifying circuits are mounted on a hinged subchassis
which swings outward from the camera, providing easy
access to every component. The video preamplifier circuits
are contained on a separate shock -mounted subchassis.
36
CAMERAS
Precision Optical Focus Mechanism
Special attention has been given to the precise mechanical requirements of the optical system for the vidicon.
Due to the small size of the picture on the surface of the
vidicon photocathode, extremely close tolerances must be
maintained on optical focus travel to avoid focus backlash.
This is achieved by an ingenious, cam -operated mechanism
which precisely translates the focus knob rotation into an
exact, nonlinear characteristic motion to the vidicon and
yoke assembly. Complete absence of focus backlash
is
thus assured, even under the severe tolerance requirements
of short focal length lenses. Also, due to the special nonlinear focus motion characteristic, the amount of focus
knob rotation required to adjust optical focus is essentially
independent of distance.
Any high quality, 16mm Type "C" mount lenses may be
used with the TK -15B camera. Up to four lenses may
be mounted in the turret at any time. A hollow- turret
shaft makes it possible to use a manual zoom lens as one
of the four lenses.
Vertical plane construction with hinged subchassis
provides complete accessibility.
(3) Deflection
linearity and amplitude are feedback
stabilized.
Thorough Electrical Filtering
Electrical interference in the camera is eliminated by means
of individual camera cable conductor barrier filters at
the cable connector and thorough shielding of the low level
video circuits. These facilities are vital to the quality of
pictures and operational reliability.
output amplifier performs the functions of video
amplification, blanking insertion, feedback clamping, linear
clipping, camera pulse amplification, gamma compensation and sync mixing. A variable gamma compensation
circuit is provided in the output amplifier chassis to provide "stretching" of black information in the picture,
thereby compensating for the black "compression" inherent
in kinescope picture reproduction. Three separate feedback
isolated video output circuits are provided with a minimum
of 40 db of isolation between circuits.
The
Simplified Self- Stabilized Circuits
A substantial saving has been achieved in the total number
of tubes used in the camera chain. In addition, the number
and complexity of setup and operating controls have been
minimized, resulting in savings to the user through reduced
demands on the skill of technical personnel. At the same
time, stability and reliability of the camera have actually
been improved. For example:
(1) All video amplifier stages are gain stabilized.
(2) Pedestal levels are stabilized by feedback clamp
circuits.
(4) Internal calibration signal permits accurate setting
of channel gain; simplifies vidicon setup adjustments.
(5) Cascode high transconductance video preamplifier
provides high signal -to -noise ratio.
(6) Detail resolution
is
sharpened by delay line aper-
ture compensation.
is avialable with several combinations of accessory equipment to fit a variety of applications. For broadcast television studio use and other applications requiring a very high quality picture monitor and
The TK -15B camera
waveform monitor, a studio camera chain is available
including a TM -6C Master Monitor and console housing.
A single WP -16B Power Supply
is
capable of powering
two camera chains. The TK -15B Vidicon Camera working
in conjunction with an Automatic Sensitivity Control, MI26191-A, makes possible virtually unattended operation.
The ASC continuously monitors the output of the vidicon
camera and translates this information into a control signal which is fed back to the Vidicon tube. The control
voltage is applied to all of the control electrodes of the
Vidicon, except the Vidicon target. This results in an
effective change of target voltage, but avoids the introduction of d -c components into the video signal with changes
in control voltage. Changes in vidicon sensitivity may thus
be made automatically to compensate for changes in scene
high -light level of approximately 20 to 1.
CAMERAS
SPECIFICATIONS
General
Type of Reproduction
Monochrome
Viewfinder Kinescope
Number of Scanning Lines
Frame Repetition Rate
Seven -inch diameter, P4 phosphor
525 or 625, 2 to
interlaced
30 or 25 per second
60 or 50 per second
15,750 or 15,625 per second
1
Field Repetition Rate
Line Repetition Rate
Incident Illumination for Best Results
Picture Polarity at Output
Maximum Length of Camera Cable
200 foot-candles
Black negative
500 feet
Lens Type
16mm C -mount
Intercom Facility
Separate engineering and production,
transistorized amplifier talk circuits, plus cue
Electrical
AC Power:
115 volts, 50, 60 cycle chain
230 volts, 50 cycle chain
Current (utility outlet)....
Input Signals:
Horizontal Drive
Blanking
..
Sync
376 watts
376 watts
Fused for 5 amperes
4 volts peak -to -peak
negative
Remote control panel mounts below master monitor for control
room operations with waveform and picture display.
4 volts peak -to -peak negative
4 volts peak -to -peak negative
Output Signals:
Picture
Picture
Picture
#1
#2
#3
Bandwidth
Aperture Compensation Peak
Boost Frequency
Aperture Compensation Amplitude
Gamma Correction Factors
Isolation between Output Lines
Output Impedance
Picture with optional sync 1.4 volts
Picture with optional sync 1.4 volts
Picture only, 1.0 volt
Essentially flat to 6 megacycles, 3 db
down at 8 megacycles
4.5 megacycles,
±0.25
Continuously variable from
O to 10 db
0.5, 0.7 and unity
40 db minimum
75 ohm coaxial, doubly terminated
Weight:
Camera
79 lbs.
Output Amplifier
Camera Control Panel.
231/2 lbs.
21/2 lbs.
Note: More complete technical specifications are available on request
Equipment Supplied
Studio Vidicon Camera Chain with TM -6C Master Monitor,
including the following:
115 V., 60 Cycles
230 V., 50 Cycles
Qty. MI Number
Description
Qty. MI Number
26023 -C
TK -158 Vidicon Camera
P26023 -C
26063 -A Output Amplifier
P26063 -A
26213 -A
Remote Control Panel
26213 -A
Viewfinder Shade
26842
26842
26084 -B
Power Supply, WP -16B
26094-B
26083 -A Centering Current Subchassis
26083 -A
26725 -ES Camera Cable, 50 feet
26725-ES
36316 -25 Lens, 25mm, f i1.5
36316 -25
36316 -50 Lens, 50mm, fi 1.5
36316 -50
TK -15B
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
36316 -75
36323 -A
26136 -C
26655
26667
26579 -B
26786
26212
TK -158
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Lens, 75mm,
f/1.9
.._
_
1
26212
1
.
TM -35
1
36316-75
36323 -A
N26136 -C
26655
26667
556579 -B
26786
1
Vidicon Tube, Type 7735 -A
Master Monitor, TM -6C
Kinescope Tube, 10SP4
Cathode Ray Tube, 5ABP1
Blower for TM-6C Master Monitor
Console Housing, 13 -inch
Console Well Adapter
for MI- 26213 -A
Studio Camera Chain with
the following:
115 V., 60 Cycles
Oty. MI Number
Camera Case (head on)
11" wide, 213/4" high, 267/8" deep
Output Amplifier (rack mounting)
14" high, 19" wide, 9" deep
Camera Control Panel
(console mounting)
11" wide, 31/2" high, 23/4" deep
Camera Control Panel
(TM -35 mounting)
73/4" wide, 2'/e" high, 31/2" deep
1
1
1
Dimensions:
1
1
me
Mechanical
1
1
1
1
1
_
1
Master Monitor,
including
230 V., 50 Cycles
Description
TK -158 Vidicon Camera
26023-C
26063 -A Output Amplifier
26213 -A
Remote Control Panel ..
26842
Viewfinder Shade
26084 -B
Power Supply, WP -16B
26083 -A Centering Current Subchassis
26725-ES Camera Cable, 50 feet
36316 -25 Lens, 25mm, f /1.5
36316 -50 Lens, 50mm, f /1.5
36316 -75 Lens, 75mm, f /1.9
Vidicon Tube, Type 7735-A
36323 -A
26154
Master Monitor, TM -35
26873
Console Mounting Adapter for TM -35
26786
Console Housing, 13 -inch
26212
Console Well Adapter
for MI- 26213 -A
Qty. MI Number
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
P26023 -C
P26063 -A
26213 -A
26842
26094 -B
26083 -A
26725 -ES
36316-25
36316-50
36316 -75
36323 -A
556154
26873
26786
26212
Accessories
Automatic Sensitivity Control Chassis (115 V., 60 cycle)
Automatic Sensitivity Control Chassis (230 V., 50 cycle).
Camera Cradle Head
TD -10 Hydraulic Pedestal
TD -11A Metal Tripod
TD -15A Tripod Dolly, folding type
Remote Control Panel, TM -35 Mounting
Adjustable Viewfinder Hood
Interphone Connection Unit
MI- 26191 -A
MI- N26191 -A
MI- 26203 -A
MI -26053
MI -26046
MI-26042 -A
MI-26161 -A
MI -26843
Ml -11784
CAMERAS
Monoscope Camera
TYPE TK -1C
FEATURES
!rg--
E.
C.'7"7c)
IOC()( ci
V
;r4
rItt
(7)
Useful to television transmitting station,
laboratory, factory, or service bench
Centralized operating controls
Compact construction; "bath tub" chassis
for standard rack mounting
Built -in high volage power supply
Auxiliary input for alignment purposes
Provision for remote control of gain
and focus
GyA6AAWW6
Pattern shows scanning symmetry, vertical
and horizontal resolution, shading, reproduction of isolated details, contrast and
brightness
Accessible arrangement
DESCRIPTION
completely self contained television camera which produces a video signal
by scanning a picture pattern built into the monoscope
pickup tube. The camera may be used as a convenient
means of generating a television picture signal for video
testing of television transmitting equipment, or for "test
pattern" transmission during warm -up and stand -by
periods. In the latter case, the station call letters may be
made a part of the pattern, thereby providing station
identification. It may, likewise, be used in the television
transmitting station as a readily available source of video
signal, of high quality, to be used in place of the studio
camera when making tests or adjustments on other units
of the system. In the laboratory, factory, or service bench,
the equipment may be used as a source of video signal
to test or adjust television receivers, video amplifiers, and
picture tubes.
The Type TK -1C Monoscope Camera
is a
The TK -1C Monoscope Camera comprises the monoscope
tube, the scanning generators, the video output amplifiers,
and the high voltage power supply for the monoscope
tube. This equipment is built on the familiar recessed "bath
tub" type of chassis which fits into a standard 19 -inch
rack. All tubes and large components are located on the
front of the chassis, while the wiring and smaller components are on the rear. The controls are grouped on a
narrow control panel along the bottom of the chassis.
When installed and in operation, the front is covered by a
large cover plate which conceals everything but the control
panel. This cover plate is interlocked to protect operating
personnel from the high voltages present in the equipment.
mounted in a vertical
position at the left of the chassis. The upper part of the
tube is enclosed in a Mumetal shield. The magnetic de.
fleeting coils are mounted within the shield, and are attached to it. By disconnecting the tube socket, anode, and
signal leads, the whole assembly -tube, coils, and shield
may be swung outward. This arrangement allows quick
The monoscope tube in the TK-1C
is
-
tube change and conserves rack space.
The monoscope tube
ordinarily used
in the TK-1C is an
RCA 2F21. This tube provides a standard test pattern which
shows the following details of the quality of reproduction
in a given television
system: scanning symmetry, resolu-
tion in both vertical and horizontal directions, shading and
reproduction of isolated details. In addition it provides a
pattern to facilitate proper adjustment of constrast and
brightness. Monoscope tubes may also be obtained with
CAMERAS
J
special pattern showing station call letter, monogram, or
other subject matter of the customer's choice. Type 1699
tubes are available on a custom basis.
both video and blanking signals) is fed to a clipper stage
which adjusts the height of the blanking "pedestals ". The
clipper feeds an output stage which consists of two tubes
having their grids tied in parallel, but with the plate circuits separate. This provides two separate ouputs -one for
The Vertical Deflection Generator consists of four tubes
and associated circuits. The first of these tubes amplifies
picture output and one for monitoring purposes.
the driving signal received from the synchronizing generator and generates a saw -tooth voltage wave which is
amplified in the second, third, and fourth tubes. The output
SPECIFICATIONS
applied to the magnetic deflecting coils of the mono scope tube. Negative feedback is employed to improve
scanning linearity.
Output Voltage
Output Impedance
Number of Scanning Lines
The Horizontal Deflection Generator includes three tubes
and associated circuits. The first tube is the d1 iving signal
Line Repetition Rate
is
1.5 volts peak-to -peak
75 ohms
525 or 625
Field Repetition Rate
60 or 50 per sec.
15,750 or 15,625 per sec.
Input Pulses Required:
Blanking, Horizontal Drive and Vertical Drive
(neg. polarity)
input amplifier and saw -tooth voltage generator; the second
and third tubes amplify the output wave and feed it to
the horizontal deflecting coils of the monoscope tube.
Resolution Capability
Power Consumption:
AC Power
280 volts, d -c
-3 volts, d -c (centering)
Amplifier is used to provide the proper level
and polarity of the blanking pulses received from the synThe Blanking
100 watts
200 ma.
300 ma
Dimensions
chronizing generator before these pulses are fed into the
Video Amplifier for mixing with the video signal.
171/2" high, 19" wide, 11" deep
Weight
55 lbs.
Tube Complement:
6 -6AC7,
Amplifier is used to provide proper level and
polarity of synchronizing pulses from the synchronizing
generator. These pulses are fed into the video amplifier
for mixing with the video signal.
The Sync
1
-991,
3- 6SL7GT, 1- 6V6-GT, 1- 6Y6 -G, 1- 1B3 -GT,
3- 6SN7 -GT
3 -6AG7,
1
-2F21,
Ordering Information
Monoscope Camera (less Monoscope Tube)
For 115 Volts, 50/60 cycles
For 230 Volts, 50/60 cycles
Monoscope Tube, 2F21...
.
The Video Amplifier includes six stages of video amplifi-
cation- together with
clipper stage which
inserted
between the fifth and sixth stages. The monoscope output
signal is fed directly into the first stage of this amplifier,
and the blanking signal is introduced in the output of the
fifth stage. The output of the fifth stage (which contains
VERTICAL
DRIVING SIGNAL
a
GENERATOR
U
HIGH
HORIZONTAL
O
DRIVING SIGNAL
V
MI-26030 -B
...MI- P26030-B
MI -26657
is
VERT ICAL
DEFLECTION
I
VOLTAGE
SUPPLY
3.5 to 5 volts
At least 450 lines
j
f
(MONOSCOPE
1
I
Accessories
Special Monoscope Tube
Power Supply, Type 580 -D
For 115 Volts, 50/60 cycles
For 230 Volts,
/`
TUBE
50/60
cycles
h
F'
VIDEO
-5,M1,--0.-
Type 1699
MI-21523-C
MI-P21523-C
OUTPUT INCLUDES VIDEO
AND BLANKINGSIGNALS
AMPLIFIER
I
HORIZONTAL
DEFLECTION
I
GENERATOR
T
I
I
A
-+--------- ---J
WITHOUT SYNC
i
I
KINESCOPE
°BLANKING SIGNAL
SYNC
SIGNAL
t
BLANKING
AMPLIFIER
I
--iL-*
TYPE 580-D
REGULATED
_I POWER
SUPPLY
STANDARD RMA
COMPOSITE SIGNAL
(WITH SYNC)
SYNC
AMPLIFIER
Block Diagram of TK -1C Monoscope Camera Circuit.
LENSES
Ortal Fixed Focus Lenses
FOR
41/2
-INCH IMAGE ORTHICON CAMERAS
35mm
50mm
75mm
127mm
8-inch
121/2-inch
AM-26882.2
MI-26882-3
MI-26882-4
MI-26882-5
MI.26882.6
MI-26882-7
Choice of lenses from 35mm to 22 -inch
focal length
Specifically designed for 4' 2 -inch image
orthicon cameras
Quick- change lens mount for ease of
insertion and removal from lens turret
16 -inch
M
I
-268828
Geared iris ring may be operated by remote control servo drive motor
Iris opening linear with respect to rotation
of index ring
Possible to maintain linear relationship
between rotation of index ring and size
of iris opening
DESCRIPTION
Fixed Focus Lenses are a series of optically
superior type fixed focus lenses for use with RCA TK -60A
41/2 -inch Image Orthicon TV cameras. In the design of the
Taylor- Hobson Ortal range, the specialized requirements
of television have been most fully taken into account. Each
lens is shaped to transmit maximum possible information
within the limits set by the television system.
The Ortal
The mechanical construction of the Ortal range of lenses,
like the optical design, has been evolved specifically for
TV camera requirements. Internal flare has been reduced
to a minimum by the use of annular reisses and by matt
blacking of all internal surfaces, together with the use of
critically positioned baffles of suitable size. This is particularly advantageous because of the low frontal lighting
often encountered in the TV studio, coupled with the extremely high sensitivity of the Image Orthicon tube as
compared with a photographic emulsion. The lenses are
treated with anti -reflective coatings to assure optimum
contrast in image formation and maximum transmission
from a given construction.
An important feature of the lens design is the iris diaphragm control mechanism which provides for complete
interchangeability between lenses on camera turrets fitted
with remote control of the lens diaphragm. This provision
is independent of focal length or maximum aperture. The
mechanism provides a linear relationship between the
rotation of the index ring and the size of the diaphragm
aperture; the f 'scale is, therefore, absolutely linear between all stops. Overall rotation of the index ring, as well
as rotation between marked aperture values, is common
to all lenses irrespective of focal length or maximum
aperture.
DESCRIPTION
When the lens is used on a camera turret incorporating
iris -drive the index ring serves as the lens gear ring. The
maximum torque required to drive the gear ring is 15
inch- ounces per lens, and the movement is smooth and free.
The mechanism is totally enclosed within the lens iris barrel
to prevent entrance of foreign matter which might cause
deterioration of the movement. Good balance on the
(Continued)
camera turret
is achieved by maintaining a weight of
pounds for each lens below 121/2 -inch focal length.
21/2
Ortal lenses feature a quick -change type TV -88 lens
The
mount, which utilizes two captive screws to secure the lens
in position. Only a half -turn of each clamp is required to
insert or remove the lens from the camera turret.
SPECIFICATIONS
Depth of Field:
f/2,8
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
ft.
INF.
22
in.
f/2.8, 35mm (1.38 -inch)
Ml- 26882-2
f/5.6
ft.
to
in.
inf.
7
ft.
in.
11
4
6
7
f/8.0
to ft.
in.
ft.
inf.
inf.
8
0
5
4
15
9
1
43
6
8
6
0
12
2
4 10
25
4
4
5
4
2
6
31/2
3
7
8
6
3
4
3
51/2
4
9
3
0
5 11
3
2
81/4
3
41/4
2
51/2
3 11
21/2
2
31/2
2
9
2
11/2
3
1
11/2
1
51/4
1
7
1
41/4
1
8
0 113/4
1
0 111/2
1
0
0
1
.75
83/4
Depth of Field:
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
1/4
91/4
0
0
83/4
in.
ft.
1
3211
2
6
11
2
2
3
72
3
2
1
5
61/2
1
10
9
4
2
0
3
5
1
10
4
2
1
8
5
1
6
1
9
1
1
21/4
1
1
0
inf.
23
63/4
4
12
23/4
15
12
31/2
10
5
27
11/4
9
31/4
6 6
10
43/4
6
3/4
19
33/4
9
1/2
5
4
8
5 41/2
4
43/4
5
93/4
4
21/4
6
4
3
91/2
4
23/4
3
71/4
4
53/4
3
534
3
2103/4
3
11/2
2
91/2
3
3
2
81/2
21/2
2
5
2
7
2
41/4
2
8
2
2
1111/2
2
1/2
2
11/4
11/2
1
53/4
1
61/4
1
63/4
51/4
1
INF.
145
7
37
4
75
8
25
21
5
30
1
18
15
13
8
16
8
12
10
9
5
10
8
7
7
8
6
5
9
4
3
2
inf.
16
61/2
10
3/4
40
11/4
1110
7113/4
3/4
8
23/4
6
91/2
3
31/2
5
11/2
3
41/2
2
71/4
3
63/4
2
31/2
2
9
2
23/4
2101/4
1101/2
2
13/4
110
2
21/2
7
1
5
1
71/4
37
8
17
1
18
8
11
9
8
810
11
6
8
6
5
7
3
811
7
1
6
2
5
7
6
6
5
311
211
4
1
310
4
2
3
3
0
211
3
1
11
2
0
11
2
1
1
1
in.
10
1
10
71/2
56
9
6
1
6
10
5
2
1
1
1
2
0 10
93/4
0
2
11/4
51/2
3
1
0 101/4
81/4
inf.
inf.
inf.
f/22.0
ft. in. to ft.
8
5
51/2
22
31/4
4
21/4
8
13/4
3
23/4
5
83/4
2
93/4
2
31/2
in.
ft. in. to ft.
in.
53/4
2101/4
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
22101/4
7
13/4
2
61/4
10
4
43/4
2
11/2
4
6 4
inf.
inf.
6
inf.
inf.
3
7
4
51/4
11
11/4
4113/4
53/4
310
2
13/4
3
1/4
2
0
3
41/4
1
101/2
1
91/4
2
33/4
1
81/4
2
53/4
1
71/4
2
1
41/2
1
73/4
1
4
1
1
31/2
1
f/11.0
in. to ft. in.
36
7
21
4
47
2
15
20
9
1010
12
2
8
9
4
6
5
6
8
9
4
11
71/2
f/8.0
ft.
inf.
inf.
210
4
1
83/4
3
5 4
3101/4
83/4
10
(3 -inch)
in. fo ft. in.
7
in.
1
0
81/4
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
f/16.0
in. to ft.
411
83/4
9
0
12
3
9
91/2
inf.
inf.
inf.
4
2
1
inf.
inf.
3
25
0
ft.
6111/4
52
0 101/2
in.
311
3
11/4
f/11.0
in. fo ft.
ft.
21/2
inf.
1
81/2
14111/4
156
2910
0
in.
f/5.6
7211
1
11
5 6
ft.
101/4
2
to
(2 -inch)
f/2.0, 75mm
ft. in. to ft. in.
50
91/2
1
31/4
f/8.0
7 2
in. fo ft. in.
0
81/2
8
ft.
7
6
in. to ft.
f/4.0
5
0
2
5
33/4
f/2.0
8
2
3
4
14
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
2
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
7
39111/4
Ml- 26882 -4
3
in.
9
ft.
1
1
3
ft.
3
21/4
Depth of Field:
6
4
in.
2
18
51/2
3
inf.
inf.
inf.
f/22.0
to ft.
in.
2
25
1
4
ft.
1
81/2
11
4
in.
28
65
1
5 10
f/16.0
to ft.
2 10
in.
100
in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
f/5.6
in. to ft.
ft.
3
INF.
inf.
in.
12
0
91/4
f/11.0
ft.
2
0 111/4
3/4
f/4.0
ft. in. to ft.
to
f/2.0, 50mm
Ml- 26882 -3
f/2.0
in.
inf.
inf.
ft.
inf.
inf.
26 8
17
f/22.0
f/16.0
in. to ft. in.
7
in. to ft. in.
ft.
18
5
13
7
ft. in. to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
13
6
10
9
inf.
inf.
5
13
2410
9
9
3311
8
5
73
5
7
0
13
6
7
5
15
6
6
8
20
8
511
inf.
inf.
3411
8
10
0
6
3
11
1
5
9
13
5
5
2
18
1
5
3
7
0
5
0
7
6
4
8
8
5
4
4
10
1
3
3
8
4
5
3
7
4
7
3
5
411
3
3
5
4
3
2
210
3
3
2
9
3
3
2
8
3
5
2
7
3
8
2
1
11
2
1
1
11
2
1
1
10
2
2
1
10
2
3
1
1
76
1
344
3
1010
811
3
S P
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
f/2.8
f/4.0
ft. in. to ft. in.
INF.
297
100
75
inf.
3
150
1
0
ft.
ft.
(Continued)
S
(5 -inch)
inf.
14810
inf.
104
4
1
60 2
30010
51
5
1
in. to ft. in.
ft.
in. to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
76
0
inf.
52
4
43
6
inf.
34
8
22
0
46
4
15
5
68
7
8
18
4
11 11
20
5
11
1
23
9
9
0
11
4
8
7
12
1
8
2
13
7
7
4
8
9
7
1
9
2
610
9
6
4
5
8
6
5
5
6
6
7
5
4
611
5
2
5
3
4
8
5
5
4
7
5
4
1
410
310
4
2
3
10
4
3
3
9
4 4
40
6
65
4
37
8
74
6
34
94
6
30
5
2
27
1
22
5
28
3
21
7
29
9
20 4
32
5
19
1
15
14
4
15
9
14
1
16
1
13
9
16
6
13
3
17
4
12
10
9
8
10
4
9
7
10
5
9
5
10
7
9
3
1011
8
710
8
2
7
9
8
3
7
8
8
4
7
6
8
6
511
411
311
6
1
510
6
2
2
5
9
1
411
5
1
510
410
6
5
5
1
410
4
1
311
4
0
311
4
3
311
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
INF.
150
f/4.0
f/5.6
in. to ft.
ft.
in.
3
inf.
11711
206 6
541
f/4.0, 203mm
MI- 26882 -6
ft.
in.
142
2
in. to ft.
ft.
in.
in. to ft.
in. to ft.
ft.
in.
7
243
2
97
2
331
9
8510
inf.
610 4
62
119
3
48
66
1
37
3411
24
inf.
271
7
inf.
1
197
5
f/22.0
f/16.0
f/11.0
108
38610
1
9
(8 -inch)
f/8.0
ft. in. to ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
3
2711
2
5910
23
Depth of Field:
2511
38
17
4211
4
ft. in. to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
917 6
36 7
50
25
5
f/22.0
ft.
in. to ft. in.
ft.
in. to ft. in.
f/16.0
f/11.0
f/8.0
191
2
6710
ON
T I
f/5.6
in. to ft. in.
208
A
C I F I C
f/2.8, 127mm
MI- 26882 -5
Depth of Field:
E
136
ft. in. to ft.
in.
in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
99
11
163 3
43
1
77 5
3310
11
37 9
23
6
41 10
0
71 11
2
60 4
294
97
4
75
66
2
88
2
92
5
59
2
102
8
54 10
50
46
0
5410
44 6
57
0
42
7
60
9
40
30
28
7
31
28 0
32
4
27
3
33
5
25
24 0
26
1
23 7'/2
26
7
23
1
27
3
23
5
28
21
5
30
5
20
4
32
20
19
41/2
20
8
19
11/2
20 111/2
18
91/2
21
43/4
18
41/2
21 111/2
17
81/2
23 0
17
0
24 43/4
15
14
8
15
4'/4
14
61/4
15
6
14
4
15
83/4
14
11/4
16
1/4
13
83/4
16
13
12
11
9'/2
8103/4
12
21/2
11
81/2
12
33/4
11
71/4
12
51/4
11
51/2
12
71/2
11
21/2
1211
9
11/4
810'/a
9
13/4
8
91/2
9
23/4
8
81/2
9
33/4
8
9
Depth of Field:
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
INF.
8
7
f/4.0
f/5.6
ft. in. to ft.
132510
f/4.0, 318mm
MI- 26882 -7
in.
ft.
in.
4
in.
inf.
ft.
483
in. to ft.
in.
ft.
242
2
151
8
1
12510
493 7
110
6
8
104
269 5
93
7
385
0
77 7
141
2
71
7
167
9
95
8
58
0
106
58
2
42
0
38
8
31
6
26
9
1
21
0
18
9
250
3
995
2
219 7
200
174
3
23410
165
8
154
5
284
5
142
3
338
150
135
1
168
8
130
0
177
6
122 11
192
7
115
2
215
100
93
3
107 10
90
9
111
4
87
4
117
0
83
5
125
0
75
50
71
2
79
3
69
9
81
1
67
9
84
1
65
4
88
1
61
48
4
51 10
47
8
52
7
46 9
53
9
45
8
55
4
43
35
34
2
35 10
33
36
2
33
5
36
9
32
11
37
5
32
23
11
26
2
23
19
4
20
8
19
24
7
25
5
24
5
25
7
24
3
20
19
9
20
3
19
8
20
4
19
6
20
6
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
687 2
252 5
25 10
17
21/2
13
33/4
5'/4
9
73/4
032.0
in.
5
9
0
ft. in. to ft.
6
281
11
6
33/4
f/22.0
in. to ft. in.
182
inf.
7
25
8
11 111/4
8
322
inf.
inf.
5
307
inf.
569 7
947
400
663 7
61/2
9 51/2
7
016.0
f/11.0
ft. in. to ft.
3
2
(121/2 -inch)
f/8.0
in. to ft.
26
4
2
11
ft.
in. to ft.
in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
11611
118
6
92
0
80
0
1
63
5
241
9
52
7
132
4
0
6111
39
2
69
7
0
40
3
29
6
43
2
23 0
27
5
22
2
28
8
21
5
18
3
22
2
4
SPECIFICATIONS
Depth of Field:
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
INF.
f/5.6
in. to ft.
in.
2167 9
inf.
7
inf.
750
.556
400
338 4
489
200
183
150
140
100
f/4.0, 406mm (16 -inch)
MI- 26882 -8
f/4.0
ft.
ft.
in. to ft.
1
3
318
8
6
219 10
117
7
160
9
95 10
104
7
f/11.0
f18.0
154811
505
(Continued)
in.
ft.
in. to ft.
inf.
inf.
1084
9
443
7
in.
inf.
inf.
3
293
2
8
537
228
11
169
6
630 2
244 0
137
2
165
7
132
4
173
94
3
106
7
91 11
109
ft.
in. to ft.
789 5
385 1
266 7
f/16.0
in.
f/22.0
in. to ft. in.
ft.
f/32.0
ft. in. to ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
272
6
inf.
200
8
inf.
200
2
inf.
163
4
2
133
11
398 0
116
7
543
3
inf.
315
9
231
7
inf.
inf.
147
2
313
160
4
3
126
9
184
0
118
5
205
2
109
9
238
1
97
11
8
89
3
113
9
85
1
121
5
80
7
132
0
74
2
inf.
727 6
325 7
154 8
8
101
72
8
77 6
71
9
78
7
70
5
80
2
68
11
82
4
66 5
86
2
63
9
91
4
59
50
49
0
51
1
48
7
51
6
48
0
52
2
47 4
53
0
46 2
54
7
4411
56
6
42
35
34
6
35
6
34
4
35
8
34
1
36
0
33
9
36
5
33 2
37
1
32
6
37
11
31
28
27
8
28
4
27 7
28
5
27
5
28
7
27
2
28 10
26 10
29
3
26
6
29
9
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
f/5.6
ft.
in.
to
f/8.0
ft.
INF.
288510
750
400
597 5
351
8
462
275
252
2
303
200
187
6
214
150
142
100
80
60
50
f/5.6, 559mm
MI- 26882 -9
in.
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
202011
to
in.
ft.
inf.
inf.
1470
in.
to
f/16.0
ft.
6
49811
in.
ft.
in.
ft.
inf.
736
7
0
inf.
373
9
28711
654 7
375 10
247 5
260
8
217 10
168 0
in.
inf.
inf.
101110
to
ft.
496
0
317
11
4
182
7
221
2
176 10
545 6
337 5
230 4
11
157 10
140
1
161
5
136
9
166
2
131
5
174 10
96
11
103
4
95
7
104 10
94
1
106
9
91
7
110
78
0
82
1
77
3
83
0
76
3
84
2
74
8
86
58
11
61
1
58
6
61
7
57
11
62
3
57 0
49
0
51
1
48
7
51
6
48
49 3
5
50 9
315 4
233
1
1
6
39
5
25 10
30
8
f/22.0
549 2
334 6
243 4
11
5
60
11
(22 -inch)
f/11.0
ft.
in.
804 1
266 0
75
Depth of Field:
in. to ft.
in.
395 7
259 9
inf.
inf.
433
0
in.
to
f/32.0
in.
ft.
inf.
inf.
507 3
304 7
H.
in.
to
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
8
225
202 0
435 5
180
3
592
4
158
6
271
7
144
11
324
8
125
8
186
5
117
1
2
88 10
114
6
84
6
122
8
3
72 10
88 10
70
0
93
7
63
4
56 0
64
8
54
4
67
1
52
3
47 3
53
1
46
1
54
8
861
3
209 8
ORDERING INFORMATION
Stock Identification
Lens
Description
Opening
Total
Total
Vertical
Field Angle
50°
Horizontal
Field Angle
MI-26882.2
1.38" Ortal Lens
f/2,8
MI-26882-3
2" Ortal
Lens
f /2.0
34.6°
28.0°
MI-26882-4
Lens
f /2.0
23.6°
19.2°
Lens
f/2.8
f /4.0
14.2°
11.4°
MI-26882-6
3" Ortal
5" Ortal
8" Ortal
9.0°
7.2°
MI-26882-7
121/2" Ortal Lens
f /4.0
5.7°
4.5°
MI-26882-8
16" Ortal Lens
f /4.0
4.5°
3.6°
MI-26882-9
22" Ortal
f/5.6
3.2°
2.6°
MI-26882-5
Lens
Lens
38.6°
LENSES
Fixed Focus Lenses
FOR 3 -INCH IMAGE ORTHICON CAMERAS -TK -14 and TK -41
35mm
50mm
85mm
135mm
MI-826159
MI-826160
MI-826161
MI-826162
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
for high
quality optical performance with 3 -inch image orthicon
cameras. All lenses are fixed- focused at infinity and are
available with focal lengths from 35 to 135mm. When used
The Fixed Focus Lenses are specic.11y designed
Specifically selected for TV camera use
High optical quality at economical cost
Lightweight construction for easy turret
manipulation
Full range of focal length and speed to
meet TV studio programming needs
Color corrected for both color and monochrome television applications
with RCA 3 -inch image orthicon cameras, focus adjustment is provided by means of the camera focus carriage.
These lenses feature high resolution which only superior
optical design and workmanship can attain; varied focal
length and adjustable speed which provide the high
degree of flexibility required for TV programming; and
precision design and lightweight construction which permit
smooth, convenient turret manipulation. All lenses mount
directly in the four -lens turret of both monochrome and
color type RCA 3 -inch image orthicon cameras. They have
a mechanical back length of 28.9mm and are supplied
with a lens hood for protection from random reflections.
SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Focal
Lens
Aperture Dial
Length
Opening
Setting
35mm
f /2.0
2, 2.8, 4, 5.6,
50mm
f/ 1.8
85mm
f /1.9
135mm
f/3.5
Angle of
View
Weight
Ib.
Length
Inches
Stock
Identification
64 °00'
4.25
MI. 826159
1.8, 2, 2.8, 4, 5.6, 8, 11, 16, 22
46 °06'
2.72
MI. 826160
1.9, 2.8, 4, 5.6, 8, 11, 16
29 °00'
4.66
MI-826161
3.5, 4, 5.6, 8, 11, 16, 22
18
5.43
MI- 826162
8, 11,
16,
22
°00'
1
1
LENSES
Standard and Telephoto Lenses
FOR 3 -INCH IMAGE ORTHICON CAMERAS -TK -14 and TK -41
25 inch
FEATURES
MI-26550-8
17 inch
Complete line of high quality lenses
selected specifically for TV camera use
MI-26590-15
13 inch
MI- 26590.14
81/2
inch
Wide range of focal lengths provide
flexibility in programming
MI- 26550.4
Lightweight construction provides
minimum turret load, easy installation
and removal
Bayonet -type mounting of long focal length
lenses permit quick exchange without
screwing threaded mount
d
lens includes variable iris opening,
individual focus adjustment and engraved
depth -of -field scale
Each
135 mm.
90 mm.
50 mm.
35 mm.
M626550-3
MI.26550.2
MI-26550-1
MI-26550-9
DESCRIPTION
variable focus lenses for 3 -inch image orthicon cameras cover a broad range of focal lengths for both studio
and field use. All lenses mount directly in the four -position
turrets of RCA TV cameras. The lens group provides utmost
The
in television studio scenes, sporting events, dra.
and makes
matic closeups and fast action scenes
possible the detailed pickup of objects varying in size,
from a coin less than 3 inches from the lens, to a ball
player located over 400 feet away.
versatility
.
.
The RCA series of camera lenses range in focal lengths
from 11/2 inches to 25 inches (35mm to 610mm). For pur
poses of description, the group of lenses will be divided
into two classes (1) Standard Lenses for Television Studio
and Field Use and (2) Telephoto Lenses for Television
Field Use.
Long Focal Length Lenses for Field Use
group of special lenses, frequently called telephoto
lenses, include the 13 -inch, 17 -inch and 25 -inch lens sizes.
The
All incorporate simplicity of design and lightweight construction. They are ideally suited for television field
uses, sports pickup, etc. Focal lengths from 13 to 25
inches enable interesting closeup, particularly when the
action is over 50 feet away. The design requirement of
lightweight construction is met by use of a thin, lightweight barrel which is provided with a light baffle to prevent internal reflections of the lens tube. The 13 -inch
and 17 -inch focal lengths employ Cooke three -element
type lens design with all optical elements coated to improve shadow details and brilliancy in the image for both
black- and -white and color television work. Each lens
has an adjustable graduated iris diaphragm to permit stopping the lens to f f32. A locking clamp prevents accidental
movement of settings. A rotatable lens hood is provided
which can be easily removed, if desired. All lenses incorporate a quick- change, precision- machined bayonet
mount which permits rapid interchange or removal of long
lenses from the camera turret as desired. The 25 -inch lens
is supplied with a complete set of fixed iris diaphragms.
closeups. All lenses are threaded to receive standard filters
and sunshades are available but not supplied.
Standard Lenses (Studio and Field Use)
This group of lenses includes the 35mm, 50mm, 90mm,
135mm and 81/2 -inch sizes. The first four lenses in this
The studio lenses employ an adjustable built -in iris and
group are of short focal length with a substantial depth of
field and require little adjustment for closeup scenes. They
are corrected for lateral and longitudinal chromatic aberration. The 81/2 -inch lens is similar in design to the long
lenses described above -it features the same lightweight
barrel, built -in iris and turret mounting bayonet adaptor.
Focusing barrel adjustments, suited to RCA camera turret
designs, permit the pre- setting of a given lens for closeups
while other lenses remain at infinity focus. This avoids time consuming re- adjustment of the focus knob for extreme
double threaded mountings of stainless steel for long wear
and safety. Lenses are specially treated by a coating
process which increases efficiency of light transmission,
thus improving the clarity, brilliance and black and white
contrast of pictures obtained. Lens elements are accurately
assembled and positioned in mounts. Inside the mounts are
light baffles which give added contrast by reducing flare.
All lens barrels carry diaphragm scales and depth of field
scales.
SPECIFICATIONS
Depth of Field:
Distance*
Focused
On
ft. in.
ft. in.
to
24
-
14
6
feet
feet
feet
feet
feet
9
4
inf.
inf.
40
7
3
-
17
9
7
6
4feet
3
feet
feet
2
3
2
6
4
4
1
6
9
101/2
-
4
3
2
13/4
Distance
f/1.9
Focused
On
ft. in. to ft. in.
feet
feet
8 feet
6 feet
5 feet
4 feet
3 feet
2 feet
15
10
85
32
19
12
9
7
5
4
14
10
7
6
5
4
3
3
2
-
32
3
17
4
9
10
7
3
5
7
3
93/4
2
-
inf.
120
37
6
9
10
8
6
5
4
-
6
3
3
6
4
8
3
3
3
6
9
-
4
8
9
3 101/4
8
11
6
5
4
3
13/4
2111/8
115/8
2
38
1
1
6
5
83/4
2
7
6
6
3
ft. in.
to
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
It. in.
5
--
4
4
6
4
3
2
9
8-
3
3
2
2
2
3
4
9
2
1
8
2
7
1
1
4
3
4
6
to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
130
3
4 6
4
3 6
-
5
29
-
14
6
3
-
43
20
8
2 105/e
12
9
6
5
4
3
113/e
2
17
12
8
7
5
4
3
6
1
6
8
91/4
41
23
--
15
11
4
inf.
inf.
63
2
13
8
23
7
4
3
11/2
5/e
--
611
5 7
4 41/2
3 83/8
2 10
1
-
3
2
3
9
2
8
2
2
6
3
21
1
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
9
6
10
5
12
-
3
8
3
2
11
2'/e
1
19
13
10
7
6
5
4
ft. in.
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
15
6
162
32
15
--
5
10
9
3
2
1
9
7
1
1
5 10
4 61/2
3 3
4
7
9
103/4
f/22
f/11
--
ft. in. to
29
9 10
6 10
5 3
4 6
2
3
3
6
6
61/2
f/5.6
--
8
3
16-
9
ft. in. to
Circle of Confusion, .002 in.
ft. in. to ft. in.
to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
1
14
9
6
4
ft. in.
f/4
-
59
27
9
3
9
6
3
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
36
-
32
ft. in.
f /1.9, 50mm
ft. in.
--
to
-
f/2.8
17
1
inf.
inf.
inf.
6
3
6
1
ft. in.
f/22
f/16
f/11
F/8
to ft. in.
Ml- 26550 -1
Depth of Field:
INF.
50 feet
25 feet
ft. in.
9
9
9
3
8
4
11
3
Circle of Confusion, .002 in.
f/5.6
f/3.3
INF.
35 feet
15
10
8
6
5
f/3.3, 35mm
Ml- 26550 -9
2
11/4
11
9
7
6
5
4
to
-
9
6
9
28
16
9
6
3
4
5
3 11
3 3
2
1
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
5
7
3
97e
2
ft. in.
7
6
6
4
6
6
3
7
21/2
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
to
ft. in.
-
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
6
25
2
13
--
9
3
7
4
9
6
81/4
2
53/4
6
9
3
6
*Distances are measured from the subject to the image plane of the camera.
Distance*
Focused
On
INF.
200 feet
100 feet
50 feet
25 feet
15 feet
10 feet
8 feet
6 feet
5 feet
4 feet
f/3.5, 90mm
Ml- 26550 -2
Depth of Field:
150
88
62
38
22
--
13 9
9 6
7 8
5 10
4 101/2
311
to ft. in.
inf.
inf.
350
75
29
16
10
8
6
5
4
-8
8
4
ft. in.
94
66
50
33
19
13
9
-6
to
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
106
33
17
11
66
50
--
6
41
29
18
12
8
--4
4
9
21/2
7 3
5 7
4 858
11/2
3
7
558
8
8
21/2
5
81/2
4 95/8
3101/2
6
5
4
4
11/2
1
ft. in.
97/e
to
f/16
f/11
f/8
f/5.6
f/3.5
ft. in.
Circle of Confusion, .002 in.
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
210
39
19
11
9
6
5
4
ft. in. to
ft. in.
48
39
33
25
---
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
16
8
50
8
21
--
6
-
12
4
4
5 5
4 71/2
Vs
3
6
5
4
--
8
6
11
8
7
91/4
9
4
8
53/8
3
f/22
ft. in. to ft. in.
33
29
25
20
--
14 6
10 6
7 10
6 8
5 3
4 6
3
8
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
96
26
13
10
7
5
4
ft. in.
24
21
20
9
3
8
458
--
17
12 8
9 6
7 4
6 3
5
4 4
3 63/4
-
to
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
37
-
16
3
11
4
7
-
6
4
8
63/4
LENSES
Depth of Field:
Distance'
f/3.8
Focused
On
ft. in.
310
200 feet
100 feet
50 feet
25 feet
15 feet
10 feet
8 feet
6 feet
5 feet
4 feet
119
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
148
42
23
14 5
9 9
7 10
59
27
15
10
ft.
INF.
1000
309
236
500
191
121
9
4
40
22
14
9
2
7
3115a
4
3/8
3
5101/2
11/8
ft.
inf.
215
inf.
inf.
177
150
104
68
to
ft. in.
22
14
2
27
14
3
15
91
2
9
ft.
ft.
inf.
373
427
299
112
53
ft.
150
20
16
13
ft.
inf.
370
1520
273
116
54
270
inf.
3380
149
85
303
46
14
ft.
717
589
to
371
176
94
ft. in.
50
25
48
24
3
7
ft.
637
560
359
173
93
fo ft. in.
51 10
25 5
to
ft. in.
48
24
1
6
to
to
8
8
5
4
6
5
4
ft.
ft.
inf.
502
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
55
52
49
43
35
26
227
136
inf.
inf.
376
121
81
131
55
45
57
185
119
75
43
ft. in.
ft. in.
ft. in.
ft. in.
26
1
23
7
15
4
14
6
26 7
15 6
23
14
to
to
ft. in.
ft. in.
37 5
17
2
18
11
9
9
4646
823
237
109
501
ft.
334
166
365
422
297
157
91
111
88
ft. in.
ft. in.
52
25
47 7
24 5
6
to
to
ft.
152
60
fo
ft.
to
to
107
176
150
103
68
41
9
2
9
5
6
9
6
5
6
5
3101/8
4
2
9
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
578
38
36
35
32
27
22
to
ft. in.
ft. in.
46
20
15
10
8
ff.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
to
ft. in.
74 6
24 11
9
f/32
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
3185
188
65
73
128
113
85
60
37
to
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
314
76
ft. in.
ft. in. to
ft. in.
ft. in.
27
22
28
3
31
5
30
1
16
1
13
7
16
9
3
15 10
5
14
f/16
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
1588
276
116
251
to
334
250
143
83
ft. in. to ft. in.
ft. in.
52
25
4610
53
45
24
2511
2
8
to
ft. in.
Circle of Confusion, .003 in.
ft. in.
7
7
11
--
7
f/22
inf.
inf.
inf.
628
3
f/11
ft.
44
20
f/32
to
f/16
ft.
inf.
inf.
996
250
to
6
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
Circle of Confusion, .003 in.
147
to
17
12
4
1P/2
ft. in.
to
---
f/22
149
9
6
ft.
f/8.0
f/6.3
ft.
5
4
inf.
to
4
3
9
4
25/8
11
7 4
ft. in.
54
42
35
26
-
18
f/5.7, 17" Objective
MI- 26590 -15
inf.
3307
768
232
108
to
f/11
213
299
230
24
INF.
1000
500
200
100
18
12
ft.
4
On (Feet)
17
inf.
to
11
f/5.6
32
2
ft.
15
Distance
Focused
4
293
25
Depth of Field:
ft. in.
ft.
14
2
9
9
8
91/2
3 10 1/2
11/8
to
ft. in.
inf.
24
14
8
to
f/8.0
15
24
148
36
f/5.0, 13" Objective
25
3
1156
92
30
ft. in.
9
71
52
34
8
21
13
6
ft. in.
inf.
inf.
inf.
f/16
75
70
65
55
43
30
5
1
to
19
12
9
to
--
f/22
Circle of Confusion, .003 in.
ft.
ft. in.
116
86
60
38
4
4
ft.
ft. in.
131
--
6 3
5 13/4
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
ft.
16
8
1071
3
7/8
ft. in.
74
54
42
30
17
10 10
7 6
5 9
4 101'4
1"4
110
99
90
ft. in.
15
6
5
4
ft.
28
5
4
4
21/e
8
inf.
inf.
inf.
inf.
298
75
ft. in.
13
9
inf.
inf.
inf.
90
32
f/11
to
ft. in. to
25
6
7
ft. in.
to
Objective
81/2"
ft.
21
---
130
72
52
34
--
10
3111,é
5/8
ft. in. to ft. in.
5
9
75
29
16
1
ft. in.
to
158
88
47
37
22
11/2
f/6.3
inf.
1070
254
48
to
5
f/5.0
inf.
inf.
inf.
13 10
9 6
7 8
5 97/e
4 103/4
ft. in.
ft. in.
150
85
5
3
inf.
inf.
inf.
MI- 26590 -14
Depth of Field:
100
50
--
f/16
f/11
f/8.0
2861
187
65
41
to
59 --
f/3.9,
to
ft. in.
23
165
ft. in.
f/5.6
ft.
568
148
60
to
113á
MI- 26550 -4
15
200
9
4 11
25
ft.
16
10
8
6
5
4
8
5/e
76
43
470
484
326
3
5
to
INF.
1000
500
176
65
28
6
5107/e
f/3.9
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
inf.
inf.
103
--
4 113/8
ft. in.
ft. in.
to
-69 -
8
6
Depth of Field:
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
ft. in.
250
Circle of Confusion, .002 in.
f/8
f/5.6
to
-75 --
INF.
200
100
50
f/3.8, 135mm
MI- 26550 -3
9
6
2310
to
f/22
f/32
ft.
ft.
211
129
inf.
inf.
inf.
443
126
201
167
inf.
inf.
inf.
111
986
125
79
138
72
166
ft. in.
ft. in.
55 6
26 3
44
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
inf.
333
183
fo
267
23
to ft. in.
57
5
to
ft. in.
ft.
to ft. in.
11
41
9
62
2610
22
9
2710
5
Depth of Field:
Distance
Focused
On (Feet)
INF.
1000
500
200
100
f/5.6
ft.
to
1669
770
435
189
97
ft. in.
50
25
49
to
3
2410
f/5.6, 25" Objective
MI- 26550 -8
ft.
inf.
1428
588
213
103
1378
734
423
187
96
ft. in.
ft. in.
5010
49
25
2410
2
to
ft.
ft.
inf.
1570
1085
685
406
183
95
611
216
104
1
to
to
ft.
ft.
inf.
1855
650
220
105
789
612
383
ft. in.
ft. in.
5011
4811
51
25
24
25
2
9
to
to
178
94
ft. in.
2
3
ft.
in.
48 6
24 7
to
ft.
ft.
inf.
2729
732
229
107
542
520
342
167
92
ft. in.
51
25
7
5
to
f/32
f/22
f/16
f/11
f/8.0
f,'6.3
ft.
Circle of Confusion, .003 in.
ft.
ft.
inf.
inf.
394
927
245
306
to
441
ft.
inf.
inf.
271
5
4510
2510
2311
55
26
ft. in. to ft. in.
4710
52
25
47
24
5
7
53
3
inf.
inf.
6382
317
123
to ft. in.
ft. in.
5
ft.
ft. in.
ft. in. to
24
to
352
260
146
84
1365
268
115
160
89
110
ft.
1
2
ORDERING INFORMATION
Total
Stock Identification
Description
f
Studio Camera Lens, 35mm
Studio Camera Lens, 50mm
Studio Camera Lens, 90mm
Studio Camera Lens, 135mm
Studio and Field Camera Lens, 81/2"
Field Camera Lens, 13"
Field Camera Lens, 17"
Field Camera Lens, 25"
Field angle applies for use with Monochrome Cameras only; to calculate angle for Color
MI- 26550-9
MI- 26550-1
MI- 26550.2
MI- 26550 -3
MI- 26550 -4
Ml- 26590 -14
MI. 26590-15
MI- 26550-8
No.
f/3.3
f/1.9
f/3.5
f/3.8
f13.9
f /5.0
f /7.0
f /5.0
Full Vertical
Field Angle
38°
27°
15°
10°
6.47°
4.23°
3.23°
2.20°
Horizontal
Field Angle*
48.5°
35°
20°
13.3°
8.4°
5.5.
4.17°
2.83°
Camera divide by 1.1.
FIELD LENSES FOR TK -41 COLOR CAMERAS
DESCRIPTION
The MI -40802 Series of Field Lenses are required to complement the normal (objective) lenses used with the RCA
Color Camera. The field lenses serve to redirect all
of the light reaching the image plane from the objective
lens so that it will enter the relay lens system of the color
camera. This insures uniform illumination of the relayed
image. The size of the primary image is not changed by
the field lens.
TK -41
The field lenses range in diopter power from 24.7 to 4.5.
In general, a field lens having a different power is required for each objective lens. Occasionally, however,
the same field lens can be used satisfactorily with more
than one objective lens. The fields lenses designed for
each of the objective lenses used are mounted on a spider
located directly behind the lens turret support drum. This
spider rotates with the lens turret as lens positions are
changed. All the field lenses are designed with identical
thickness and location to avoid changes in the position of
the primary image as lenses are interchanged.
Field lenses are made of spectacle crown glass of finest
quality, precision centered and edged. Each is 1.812 inches
in diameter with /2mm beveled edge and is Y2 inch thick
1
at the central point. Both surfaces have a baked magnesium fluoride coating for minimum green reflection at
normal incidence.
Each field lens is set in a brass lens assembly consisting
of a lens holder approximately 3 inches in diameter before
knurling, with lens cap and a mask. Each of the lens
elements are accurately assembled and positioned. All lens
holders carry stencilled diopter power markings.
Ordering Information
Field Lens (20.0 diopter) for 50mm objective lens
Ml- 40802 -Al
Field Lens (13.5 diopter) for 85mm, 90mm and 135mm
objective lens
MI-40802-A2
Field Lens (7.0 diopter) for Electra Zoom and also
81/2 objective lens
M1- 40802-A3
Field Lens (5.75 diopter) for 13 ", 15 ", 17"
and Berthiot Zoom objective lenses
MI-40802-A4
Field lens (4.5 diopter) for 25" objective lens
MI- 40802-A5
Field Lens (16.5 diopter) for 75mm objective lens
MI- 40802 -A6
(24.7 diopter) for 35mm objective lens
MI- 40802-A7
Field Lens
LENSES
Vidicon Camera Lenses
MI -36316 SERIES
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
Distinguished for clarity of detail, faithfulness to subject and extreme depth of focus
Built -in hood protects against lens flare
A complete set of Vidicon Camera Lenses are stocked by
RCA to provide a wide variety of professional quality
lenses for
industrial, educational, medical, military and
other closed circuit television applications. These lenses
incorporate all of the latest optical refinements and combine precision design with sturdy mechanical construction.
Varied lens speeds and focal lengths provide necessary flexibility for indoor or
outdoor applications
Precision design -lightweight construction
Focusing mount included with all lenses
A complete selection of normal, wide -angle and telephoto
lenses is available to complement RCA s extensive line of
vidicon camera equipment. All lenses are furnished in
focusing C- mounts and include an adjustable iris. In addition, all lenses are specially coated to produce sharp,
high -contrast images. The Ml -36316 series includes normal,
wide angle and telephoto lenses for use on any vidicon
camera with a 1" 32 thread, 16mm, C- mount.
SPECIFICATIONS
Stock
Description
Identification
Focal
Length
Focusing
Scale
Aperture
From
To
Filter
Size
Where Used
STANDARD LENSES
Wide -Angle Lens
MI-36316-12
12mm
1,
x.5.5
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
Wide -Angle Lens
MI-36316-13
13mm
1
ft. to inf.
f/1.5 f/16.0
x6
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
Normal Lens
MI-36316-25
25mm
2
ft. to inf.
f/1.5
f/16.0
x4.5
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
Medium Telephoto Lens
MI-36316-50
50mm
2
ft. to inf.
f/1.5
f/22.0
x5.5
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
Telephoto lens
MI-36316-75
75mm
3
ft. to inf.
f/ 1.9 f/22.0
x7
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
Telephoto Lens
MI-36316-102
102mm
1
f/2.7
x6
TV-Eye, TK-202, TK-21C
2
1/2
ft. to inf.
ft. to inf.
f/ 1.2
f716.0
f/22.0
4
4
II
Table of Field Sizes for 16mm Vidicon Camera Lenses
Distance
from Lens
to Subject
in Feet
9.5mm (3/e")
Height
2
l'-8"
3
4
2'-8"
3'-9"
4'-10"
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
90
100
Distance
from Lens
to Subject
in Feet
5'-11"
6'-11"
7'-11"
8'-11"
9'-11"
Width
2'.2"
3'-6"
4'-10"
6'-7"
12mm
l'-4"
2'1 "
2'-11"
3'-11"
7'-11"
9'-2"
4'.8"
10,-6"
6'-3"
11'-10"
13'-2"
(31/64")
Height
5'-S"
7'4"
7-10"
Height
l'-9"
l'-2"
l'-7"
0'-8"
0'-10"
2'.9"
3'-10"
5'-2"
V-11"
2'-8"
l'-0"
l'-4"
3,-8,,
2'-7"
3'-6"
4'-10"
6'-3"
7'-3"
8'-4"
9'-4"
10'.5"
4'-4"
5'.1"
5'-9"
6'-6"
7'-2"
5'-9"
6'-9"
7'-8"
8'-8"
9'-7"
2'-2"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-4"
3'-10"
8'-8"
10'-2"
11'-7"
13'-0"
14'-5"
11'-6"
13'-6"
15'-5"
17'-4"
19'-3"
4'-7"
1
'-4"
l'-10"
Width
'-10"
2'.6"
0'-4"
0'-6"
0'-8"
0'-11"
3'-0"
l'-1"
1
3,_6"
(2")
Height
1
'-3"
Width
CV-8"
0'-11"
'-3"
1
1,-6"
1
'-9"
4'-0"
4'-6"
5'-0"
l'-6"
l'-8"
2'-3"
2'-8"
3'-0"
3'-5"
3'-9"
3'4"
6'-9"
7'-6"
6'-0"
7'-0"
8'-0"
9'-0"
10'-0"
1
'-11"
2'43"
2'-3"
2'-6"
9'-5"
10'-11"
12'-6"
15'-8"
12'-6"
14'-7"
16'-8"
18'-10"
20'-10"
24'-8"
29'-11"
34'-7"
39'-8"
44'-5"
49'-4"
32'-11"
46'-1"
52'-8"
59'-3"
65'-9"
19'-8"
23'-5"
27'-4"
31'-2"
35'-2"
39'-0"
26'-3"
31'-2"
36'-5"
41'-7"
46'1 0"
52'-0"
18'-0"
21'-8"
25'-3"
28'-11"
32'-5"
36'-0"
24'-0"
28'-10"
33'-8"
38'-6"
43'-3"
48'-0"
9'-4"
11'-2"
13'-1"
15'-0"
16'-11"
18'-8"
12'-6"
15'-0"
17'.6"
20'-0"
22'-6"
25'-0"
4'-8"
S'-7"
6,-6"
7'-6"
8'-5"
9'-4"
6'-3"
7'-6"
8'-9"
10'-0"
11'-3"
12'-6"
59'-2"
78'-11"
92'-0"
105'.3"
118'-5"
131'-7"
46'-10"
54'-8"
62'-5"
70'-2"
78'-0"
62'-5"
72'-10"
83'-2"
93'-7"
104'-0"
43.-3"
50'-5"
57'-8"
57'-8"
67'-3"
76'-11"
86'-6"
96'-0"
22'-6"
26'-2"
30'-0"
33'-10"
30'-0"
35'-0"
40'-0"
45.-0"
50,-0"
1V-3"
13'-1"
15'-0"
16'-11"
18'-9"
15' -0"
69'-l"
78'-11"
88'-1 0"
98'-8"
75mm
Height
4
5
0'-6"
6
7
0'-9"
0'-10"
39'-l"
(3")
Width
0'-6"
0'-8"
0'1 0"
l'-0"
l'-2"
14%1"
102mm
Height
0'-2"
0'-3"
0'-4"
Cr-6"
(4")
Width
l'-8"
0'41"
l'-1"
20
2'-0"
2 -3"
2'-6"
2'-0"
2.-4"
2'-8"
3'-0"
3'-4"
25
30
35
40
45
50
3'-2"
3'-9"
4'-5"
5'-0"
5'-8"
6'-3"
4'-2"
5'-0"
5'-10"
6'-8"
7'-6"
8'-4"
2'.4"
2'-10"
3'-3"
3'-9"
4'-3"
4'-9"
60
70
80
90
100
7'-6"
8'-9"
10'-0"
11'-3"
12'-6"
5'-8"
6'-7"
7'-6"
8'-5"
9'-4"
7'-6"
8'-9"
10'-0"
1F-3"
12'-6"
l'-6"
l'-9"
10'-0"
'-8"
13'-4"
15'-0"
16'-8"
1 1
l'-6"
l'-8"
l'-10"
72'-0"
125mm
Height
0'-9"
0'-11"
l'-0"
l'-2"
l'-3"
l'-6"
l'-9"
2'-0"
2'-3"
2'-6"
Width
0'-3"
0'-4"
0'-6"
0'-5"
Cl'-7"
CV-6"
0'-8"
0'1 0"
0'1 1"
0'-9"
l'-0"
0'-11"
l'-2"
1
l'-10"
3'-2"
3'-9"
l'-10"
4'-S"
2'-8"
3'-0"
2'-6"
3'-0"
3'-6"
4'-0"
4.-6"
5'-0"
S'-8"
6'-3"
37'4"
150mm
Height
2'-0"
Width
-
-
-
-
0'4"
0%6"
-
0'-7"
0'-8"
0'-9"
0'10"
0'-9"
0'-11"
Height
l'-0"
l'-4"
l'-6"
l'-8"
0'-10"
0'-11"
l'-7"
l'-10"
2'-l"
l'-2"
2'-6"
2'-11"
3'4"
l'-10"
2'-2"
4'-2"
6'-0"
7'-0"
5'-0"
2-10"
S'-10"
3'-4"
6'-0"
6'-9"
8'4"
6'4"
9'-0"
7%6"
10'-0"
6'-3"
22'4"
25'-0"
7'-6"
8'-4"
Width
0'-9"
0'-9"
'-0"
'-1"
1
S'-3"
4'-6"
17'-6"
20'-0"
----
l'-2"
l'-3"
2'-6"
2'-10"
3'-2"
3'-6"
4'-0"
4'-6"
5'-0"
200mm (8")
(6")
-
'-7"
l'-4"
l'-6"
5'.0"
S'-4"
6'41"
(5")
0'-1"
V-4"
l'-0"
l'-1"
l'-3"
64'11"
0'-5"
0'-6"
0'-8"
0'-7"
0'-8"
0'-9"
0'-10"
12
14
16
18
50mm
Width
l5'-9"
3
9
10
25mm (1")
(33/64")
Height
18'-5"
21'-0"
23'-8"
26'-4"
11'-10"
13'-10"
15'-9"
17'-9"
19'-9"
2
8
13mm
Width
1
l'-3"
l'-7"
l'-10"
2'-3"
2'-6"
2'-10"
3'-1"
3'-9"
4'-5"
5'-0"
5'-7"
6'-3"
LENSES
Varotal Lenses
Studio Varotal
V
Lens mount.
FEATURES
d
on RCA Type TK.60A TV Camera.
DESCRIPTION
The Studio Varotal V and Outdoor Varotal III are vari-
Variable focal length lens for either color
or monochrome RCA cameras
Optical quality comparable to high -quality
fixed focal length lenses
Continuously variable focal length
Constant optical speed throughout range
Fully color corrected
Smooth, precise lever action provided for
manual control
Easily installed or removed from camera
able focal length lenses designed to cover the full range
of focal lengths normally used for television programming. By eliminating the need to switch to a second
camera for change of lens turret position, the Varotals
provide means of producing a variation of close -up and
distance "shots" with only one camera. The lenses enable
observation of detailed processes without the loss of continuity entailed in changing lenses. In addition, dramatic
effects may be obtained by "zooming" from a distance
shot to a close -up of one portion of the scene, or from
a close -up view to a distance shot.
Outdoor Varotal Ill
The Outdoor Varotal Ill Lens has been designed for versa-
tile use in studios or on remotes. It features a unique dual
range change from 4 to 20 inches and from 8 to 40 inches
by means of a small lever on the lens- without change
of rear element or loss of picture focus. High quality
definition is achieved and the lens is fully color corrected
and designed for use on both color or monochrome cameras. Minimum object distance for which the entire zoom
range is available is twelve feet, and a close -up adaptor
is available for reducing the minimum object distance to
six feet.
The zoom and focus controls for the Varotal Ill are combined in a lever mechanism which mounts on a bracket
attached to the rear of the camera. The controls are
mechanically coupled to the lens by means of a pair of
flexible cables and a precision gearbox which is mounted
on the lens. Zoom control is provided by rotation of the
lever. Focus control is provided by rotation of a knob
mounted on the zoom control lever. The direction of rotation of the focus knob, with respect to focusing action,
corresponds to that of the regular camera focus knob, for
ease and familiarity of operation. An adjustable friction
brake is provided to vary the amount of pressure required
to operate the zoom control in accordance with individual
operator preference. This brake may also be used to
lock the zoom control at any desired point within the
zoom range.
Varotal V
is mounted on a bracket at the right rear
of the camera, and a lever on this control adjusts the
focal length of the lens. A knob is attached to this lever
for adjustment of zoom friction and may be used to lock
the iris at any point within the zoom range. The zoom
mechanism is a dual speed device which has two output
couplings permitting a choice of zoom speeds by attaching the control cable to the desired output coupling. The
focus control handle is attached to the camera pan and
tilt head handle at left rear of the camera and is coupled
to the lens by a flexible cable. The Varotal V lens requires
a field lens when used on a TK -41 Color Camera.
zoom mechanism
Three range extenders and a close -up adaptor are available as accessories for the Varotal V. The extenders change
the range of the basic lens to 2.4 to 24 inches, f 6.0; 3.2
to 32 inches, fr 8.0; and 4.8 to 48 inches, f 12.0. The close up adaptor has a minimum object distance of three feet.
The Varotal V is a new Zoom lens with a focal length
The Varotal Ill and V are mounted on the RCA TK -11, 31
range of 1.6 to 16 inches and a relative aperture of f 4.0
to f 22.0 throughout the zoom range. The focal length
and optical speed of this lens make it suitable for both
studio and outside broadcast use. The linear iris mechanism conforms to all requirements for adjustment by an
iris motor drive system or manual operation. The separate
zoom and focus control of the lens are mechanically
coupled to the lens by two separate flexible cables. The
and TK -14 monochrome TV Cameras by means of a special
mounting plate which is readily installed in place of the
standard camera turret. Either lens may be mounted
directly on the TK -60 camera turret. Control cables and
a suitable mounting bracket for the zoom and focus control mechanism are supplied with the lens. Ordering information should specify the type of RCA camera on which
the lens
is
to be mounted.
SPECIFICATIONS
Varotal
Varotal III
20" and
Focal Length Range
4 to
Optical Speed
f /4.0 to f'45.0
f /8.0 to f/32.0
Object Distance
12
Length (face of turret to end of lens)
_
Approximate Weight:
Basic Optical Unit
.
Control Lever and Cables
to 40 ", range selected by lever
feet to infinity
16"
1.6 to
f'4.0
to
6 feet to
251/4"
17"
33 lbs. (68 lbs. in transit case)
15 lbs.
4 lbs.
5 lbs.
Order
ORDERING INFORMATION
8
as
Varotal Ill and specify RCA Type
Camera
V
f'22.0
infinity
Order as Varotal V and specify RCA Type
Camera
Accessories
Range Extender
1
Range Extender 2
2.4 to 24" at
._
- --
...
Adaptor
Held Lens for RCA
atf /8.0
4.8 to 48" at f /12.0
Range Extender 3
Close -up
3.2 to 32"
f/6.0
.
TK -41
Color Camera
Min. object distance 6 ft.
Min. object distance
MI-40802-A3
MI-40802-A3
3
ft.
LENSES
Vidicon
Studio Zoom Lens
FOR TK -15 TV CAMERA
DESCRIPTION
The Type
L
-20 Berthiot Pan -Cinor Lens
manually operated zoom lens for
cameras. The
L
-20
use on
high quality
a
Vidicon studio
large aperture lens designed to
a
is
is
permit operation under adverse lighting conditions. It offers
constant brightness while zooming, excellent image sharpness at all
optical lengths, and reliable operation.
The Berthiot
L
-20 Zoom Lens exhibits excellent resolution
and contrast throughout the zoom range even at maximum aperture and maintains focus exceptionally well. The
lens
is
equipped with
phragm calibrated in
f
2.6 and
f/16.
continuously variable iris dia-
a
"f"
stops and
adjustable between
is
The optical speed of the lens remains
constant at the value indicated by the aperture adjustment throughout the entire zoom range.
The lens
is
provided with
front lens or filter. The lens
FEATURES
action
1
is
shade and holder for
operated mechanically from
the rear of the camera by means of a rod. The zoom
Provides greater camera flexibility
4 to
a lens
is
controlled by
a
push -pull
movement and lens
focus by rotating a knob on the end of the rod. The lens
is
zoom range
designed to fit the rotatable lens turrets of the RCA
Type
Sharp focus through entire focal range
TK -15
Vidicon
Studio cameras.
Other
free
lens
sockets of the camera turret can be used to accommodate
High resolution and contrast at all lens
settings
Simple turret mounting for rigidity and
ease of installation
fixed type lenses. The L -20 lens focus range
to 5 feet. Adaptors which mount on the
is
from infinity
front of the zoom
lens can be ordered separately for close camera
work.
An 0.5 diopter lens permits focus down to 334 feet. A
1
.0
diopter lens permits focus down to 2'2 feet.
SPECIFICATIONS
Minimum Focal Length
Maximum Focal Length
Aperture Range if constant over zoom range)
Normal Area Covered
Maximum Diagonal Covered
f/2.6
to
(1
")
14
")
f'16
9 by 12mm
17.5mm
Distance Range:
Without Close -up Lens
With 0.5 Diooter Close -up Lens*
With 1.0 Diopter Close -up Lens*
Not supplied with lens but available
23mm
115mm
Infinity to 5 ft.
6.5 ft. to 3.75 ft.
3.50 ft. to 2 50 ft.
as
accessories.
Back Focus (distance from rear lens to image plane)
Total Length (from image plane to front of lens)
Size of Drop -in Filter
Weight
41.17mm
232mm
75mm
3%
lbs.
Ordering Information
Berthiot Zoom Lens
Type
L
-20
r
LENSES
Television Zoomar Lenses
Upper left -Angenieux Zoomar Lens, Model 10.2 -1 -B and upper right, Hyper Universal Zoomar with its close-up adaptor.
Both lenses fit 412 -inch I.C. cameras. Lower row shows Converters =1, =2 and =3 respectively and an Interchangeable
Adaptor which permits us, of the lenses with 3 -inch I.O. cameras. These four items are available as accessory equipment.
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
Completely color balanced and corrected
for monochrome and color cameras
Conversion of zoom ranges by means of
quick -change adaptor
Zoom operations and focus adjustment
combined in single control rod
Television Zoomar Lenses greatly facilitate programming
by eliminating many problems of camera location and by
reducing the number of cameras required to cover an
event. Two types of Zoomar lenses are available to fit all
RCA Image Orthicon Cameras for studio or field operation.
The Angenieux Zoomar has a basic range of 35 to 350mm
at a speed of f 3.8 and a transmission of T 4.5. It will
zoom through its entire range at any object distarce from
3 feet to infinity. The resolution and frequency response
of the lens makes it the equal or superior of most fixed
focus lenses.
Self- supporting -no external bracing
necessary
Maintains optical speed throughout zoom
The Hyper Universal Zoomar basic lens zooms from 57 to
400mm at a speed of f 3.9. Its range of object distance
is from 16 feet to infinity. An oil damping device at the
base of the lens permits the operator to vary the tension
LENSES
The Model 10.2.1.B Angenieux Zoomar Lens shown mounted directly
to turret of RCA TK -60A 1.0. Camera. Control rod governs both zoom
and focus of these versatile lenses.
or drag on the zoom rod. This lens is supplied with a
close -up adaptor providing a minimum focus distance of
4 or 6 feet to infinity.
Both Zoomar lenses are designed for use with 41/2-inch
Image Orthicon cameras. An accessory interchangeable
adaptor is available to permit use of the lenses with 3 -inch
Image Orthicon TV cameras. All zoomars are color balanced and color corrected. The lenses are moderate in size
and weight and are designed to mount directly on the
camera lens turret. Zoom and focus control are provided
by means of a rod which passes along or through the
camera to the rear. Zoom adjustment is performed by moving the rod in or out, and focus is adjusted by rotating
the same control rod. Both lenses have a geared iris ring
for operation by the iris drive mechanism of an RCA TK -60
Camera. A series of converters for range extension are
available for use with either type Zoomar lens to allow
increased versatility of programming.
SPECIFICATIONS
Angenieux Zoomor
Model 10 -2.18
Hyper Universal
Zoomar
Zoom Range and Speed:
f/3.8
Basic Lens
35 to 350mm,
*With Converter r-1
*With Converter =2
*With Converter #3
2.45 to 22.5 ", f/5.6
3.6 to 26 ", 1/8.0
5.7 to 57 ", f /11.0
f/3.9
f/5.6
40 ", f /8.0
2.5 to 16 ",
4 to 25 ",
6.5 to
11.5 to 70 ", f /11.0
Object Distance:
3 ft. to
With All Converters
Lens With Close -up Adaptor
3
--
infinity
ft. to infinity
4 to 6 ft. to infinity
Mounting Provision, basic lens
Quick Change Mount for
41/2" I.O. Cameras
Quick Change Mount for
41/2" I.O. Cameras
Method of Mounting to 3" I.O. Cameros
*Interchangeable Adaptor
*Interchangeable Adaptor
Length (basic lens, less converters)
17"
17.5"
Weight (basic lens only)
25 lbs.
12
Lens
' Not
56
infinity
ft. to infinity
Basic Lens
supplied with lens but available
as
16 ft. to
16
lbs.
accessories.
7150
CAMERA MOUNTS
Counterbalanced Camera Pedestal
It
FEATURES
Easily operated by one man
Dual rubber -tired wheels for extra
stability
Counterbalanced camera
raised or lowered
is
easily
Storage compartments in base for
extra weights, tools, etc.
Arrows on steering wheel
direction of wheels
show
Adjustable guards prevent wheels
from running into cables
Drag clutch to suit individual
quirements
DESCRIPTION
The
Counterbalanced
Camera
Pedestal,
TD -3A,
offers
complete mobility to cameras for normal studio requirements and needs only the cameraman to operate. The
Pedestal provides for smooth, running dolly shots, raising
and lowering of the camera while on the air, and smooth
horizontal and vertical pann.ng when used with Cradle
Head, MI- 26203 -A. It gives a firm, stable mount to television cameras, resulting in more versatile operation and
steadier pictures. The TD -3A has been especially designed
for use in the studio and in other indoor places where
telecasts might be made. It provides special safety features for both operators, and
cables and studio props.
programming
equipment
quickly and easliy moved in any direction
by the cameraman. A steering wheel, which is directly
below the camera at all heights, guides the three sets of
duct wheels. Two types of steering are available:
The Pedestal
is
(1) Synchronous steering in which all wheels are locked
parallel and turn simultaneously. This
ing in a straight line.
is
best for track-
(2) Tricycle steering in which only the forward wheel turns
with the steering wheel; the back wheels are locked
parallel. This enables the Pedestal to be turned sharply
in
any direction.
re-
CAMERA MOUNTS
The Pedestal may be changed instantly from one type of
steering to the other without displacemeit of the camera.
Six hard- rubber -tired wheels are mounted in pairs and
equipped with ball bearings for smooth cnd silent rolling.
Wheel cable guards cari be raised or lowered as desired.
is carefully counterbalanced with adjustable weights, it may be raised or lowered simply by lifting
or pushing on the steering wheel or camera. Addis onal
camera weight such as large lenses, lig its, etc., is easily
compensated for by the use of additional weights to
counterbalance. A drag clutch is provided to suit individual requirements. A brake locks the column at any
desired height. Raising, lowering, locking or drag adjustment can be made by the cameraman anywhere in the
360 degree position of the Pedestal without his having to
stoop or bend. This makes it possible to raise or lower the
camera while the Pedestal is in motion.
Since the camera
Arrows on steering wheel show direction of wheels.
Lower ring locks column and controls drag.
The Pedestal base is made of arc -welded steel; the center
SPECIFICATIONS
column of seamless steel tubing. It is finished in gray
hammertone; the trim and steering wheel of satin chrome
Overall Dimensions (not including Friction Head):
Height (maximum)
57"
Height (minimum)
36"
381/4"
Base Width (Maximum) ...
(Will pass through doorway 341/2" wide)
596 ibs.
Net Weight
750 lbs.
Shipping Weight
Ordering Informatio-t
completely assembled, with lead counterweights
Ml- 2o')36
stowed in base storage ompartments
TD -3A Pedestal,
Accessories
Cradle Head
Counterweights for TD -3A
Pedestal with housing removed, showing placement of lead
weights for counterbalancing camera.
Storage compartments
in base provide con-
venient space for
extra
lead
took, etc.
58
weights,
(
e¢iired for
TK -60
Cameras)
MI- 26703 -A
M' -26351
CAMERA MOUNTS
Motor Driven Camera Pedestals
TYPES TD -9AC & TD -9AM
FEATURES
Motor driven lift mechanism provides new
ease and smoothness of operation -allows
cameraman to raise or lower camera without taking hands off camera control
Height adjustable from 34 to 54 inches
Lightweight
-
yet sturdily constructed to
carry all types of studio cameras
Seven -second cycling from maximum low
to maximum high
h.p. drive mechanism shock mounted in
sound proof casing
13
Synchronous and tricycle steering offers
complete mobility in small areas
DESCRIPTION
RCA Motor Driven Camera Pedestals are designed to pro-
vide convenient mounting with maximum maneuverability
for TV cameras. Two models are available. The TD -9AC
with large 34 -inch steering wheel, is designed to mount
color television cameras, and the TD -9AM, with 25 -inch
diameter steering wheel, is specified for monochrome and
smaller type cameras. The pedestals are identical except
for size of the steering wheel. The steering wheels are
interchangeable so that one pedestal can be used for either
color or monochrome cameras.
The pedestals provide two types of steering: synchronous,
in which all wheels are locked parallel and turn simul-
taneously; or tricycle, in which only the forward wheel
turns with the steering wheel and the back wheels are
locked parallel. The former is best for tracking in a straight
line, the tricycle steering enables the pedestal to be turned
sharply in any direction.
f
Pedestal height is controlled by a 1/3 h.p. motor which
operates through a reduction gear and lifting cable. The
entire drive mechanism is shock mounted and encased in
a sound proof casing. The casing has three suit -case type
catches which open for easy access to motor, relays, and
associated control mechanism. The drive mechanism is
operated by a single two -way (nominally off) control
switch. The camera can be raised from lowest to highest
position in 7 seconds. The direction is instantly reversible.
The pedestal has a ruggedly constructed re- inforced metal
base which will pass through 35 -inch doorways. The
column is of seamless tubing, and a special column head
casting permits accessibility to the tilt or cradle head
mounting nut. The base contains the a -c power socket and
control cable connector. It rolls quietly on rubber -tired
wheels. Adjustable cable guards are provided on each
wheel to protect cables and other studio equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall Dimensions not including cradle head;
Height
533/4" max., 341/2" min.
Width and Depth (maximum at base)
381/4"
Width and Depth (minimum at base)
._
35"
Net Weight
365 lbs.
Shipping Weight __ __
490 lbs.
._
Ordering Information
TD -9AC
Pedestal (for Color TV Cameras):
115 volts, 60 cycles, 6 amps
MI- 40861 -A
230 volts, 50 cycles,
MI- N40861 -A
3
amps
Pedestal (for monochrome TV Cameras):
115 volts, 60 cycles, 6 amps _
MI- 26038-A
23) volts, 50 cycles,
MI.N26038 -A
TD -9AM
3
amps
34" Diameter Steering Wheel (supplied with
TD -9AC)
MI -40862
25" Diameter Steering Wheel (supplied with
TD -9AM).
MI -26039
CAMERA MOUNTS
Lightweight Camera Pedestal
TYPE TD -7
FEATURES
Ideal for the small studio
Choice of parallel or tricycle steering
Easy, smooth
dollying
Adjustable guards prevent wheels from
rolling over cables
Height adjusts from 34 to 55 inches
Sturdy construction for years of service
DESCRIPTION
The TD -7 Lightweight Camera
Pedestal provides a firm,
stable mount for television cameras. The new pedestal is
lightweight and maneuverable and designed with the
small type TV studio in mind. It accommodates friction,
cradle or any other standard type heads for smooth horizontal panning and vertical tilting. The pedestal is easily
positioned in the studio or rolled for running dolly shots,
and it has provisions for raising and lowering the camera
quickly and easily. Better showmanship, more versatile
camera effects and smoother television production can be
achieved by the cameraman as a result of the new operating ease and better control afforded by the TD -7. Two
models are available: The Type TD -7A0 for use with
studio cameras such as the RCA TK -14 and TK -60 Cameras
(90 to 170 lbs.), and the Type TD -7AV counterbalanced
for lighter Vidicon cameras (60 to 90 lbs.) such as the
RCA TK -15 Camera.
The TD -7 Lightweight Camera Pedestal is precision built of
the finest metals -steel, aluminum, bronze -each tested and
selected for its specific purpose and engineered to give
years of dependable service. Weighing only 140 pounds,
it is easily positioned in the studio or rolled to any studio
point by the cameraman alone. It rolls smoothly and
quietly on rubber-tired, ballbearing wheels. Adjustable
cable guards are provided on each wheel to protect cables
and other studio equipment.
The TD -7 features two types of steering: parallel steering,
in which the three wheels are locked parallel and turn
together; and tricycle steering, in which all steering is done
with the rear wheel, while the front wheels are locked in
parallel. The former type is used for straight -line tracking
in running dolly shots, while tricycle steering enables the
pedestal to turn sharply in any direction or to rotate
around its own axis. Changing from one type of steering
to the other is accomplished by simply lifting the steering
wheel. By rotating the wheel 180 degrees, it can be used
either as a tee handle or a semi -circular steering wheel.
The camera pedestal is quickly and easily raised or lowered
by turning a hand wheel conveniently located on the side
of the column. The center column and steering shaft are
readily removed from the base for transporting the pedestal to field locations.
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall Dimensions (not including Head):
55" max., 34" min.
34" max., 30" min.
Height
Width
Net Weight
Shipping Weight
140 lbs.
200 lbs. (approx.)
Ordering Information
Type TD -7A0 (Crank lift type for TK -14, TK -60 Cameras)
Type TD -7AV (Crank lift type for TK15 Camera)
MI-26044 -A
MI -26054
Accessories
Cradle Head (for TK14,
TK -60 or TK -15)
MI- 26203-A
i
CAMERA MOUNTS
Hydraulic Camera Pedestal
TYPE TD -10
FEATURES
Camera easily and rapidly raised with
hydraulic lift
Base legs adjustable to expand
wheel spread
Fully adjustable cable guards
Large 8 -inch diameter wheels for
,ia
smooth dollying
Swivel locks on wheels
Low cost
DESCRIPTION
Hydraulic Camera Pedestal, MI- 26053, is an
attractive chrome -trimmed mount designed for use with
RCA TK -14, TK 15, and other monochrome television cameras. This sturdy pedestal is an economical choice for many
studio and field applications.
The TD -10
The TD -10 offers greater convenience and utility than a
combination tripod and dolly at a comparable price. Set
is held to a minmum. Between camera shots the
hydraulic lift allows height adjustments to be made easily
and rapidly for operator preference; an important feature
not easily accomplished with the tripod and dolly. Simple
adjustments to the legs may be made to expand the
wheel base. The large wheels provide smooth dolly shots.
up time
meets the requirement for a camera
mount that is easier to adjust in base width and height
than the tripod -dolly combination, yet is more economical
than pedestals which have the facility for providing smooth
"on air" height adjustments.
The TD -10 pedestal
The Type TD -10 Camera
Pedestal features a
hydraulic
lift built into the lightweight center column to allow camera operator to easily raise the top of the pedestal to
any desired operating height between 35 to 60 inches
from the floor. The camera is lowered by simply releasing
the hydraulic valve. A three -position positive lock is provided at the pedestal base for a coarse adjustment of
pedestal height.
The pedestal comes complete with sturdy metallic three -
legged base which eliminates the need of a mounting
dolly. A three position positive lock is provided on each
leg to extend the base to achieve maximum stability and
maneuverability. The base dimensions may be expanded
from 32 to 43 inches. Large eight -inch diameter wheels
employ full caster ball bearings for smooth dollying action.
They are provided with individually adjustable cable
guards. A swivel lock is included on each wheel so that a
fixed position may be maintained when desired.
makes possible an attractive highly
versatile mounting for monochrome cameras at a remarkably low price. Provisions are made for easy access to
the head mounting nut. The standard RCA cradle or friction head may be used. The pedestal is easily disassembled
into a small package for transporting to remote locations.
The TD -10 Pedestal
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall Dimensions not including head):
Height (maximum)
Height (minimum)
Base, not extended (minimum dimension)
Base, extended (minimum dimension)
_..
Weigh`
60"
35"
32"
43"
76 lbs.
Ordering Information
Type TD -10 Hydraulic Camera Pedestal
MI-26053
Accessories
Cradle Head
MI- 26203-A
CAMERA MOUNTS
Pneumatic-Balance Pedestals
TYPE
PN6 Series
FEATURES
unit with counter -balanced
action easily does two -man dolly shots
with single operator
Lightweight
Smooth effortless camera positioning
both vertical and horizontal planes
in
Rotatable base -readily relocated anywhere
in 360 degrees
Light enough to be dollied sideways, either
direction, while "booming" up or down
Welded steel construction -light but strong
Simple, easy maintenance
DESCRIPTION
Piwuiiiutic Buluncc Pedestals fill the
need for a camera support that provides smooth, even
motion in both the vertical and horizontal planes, and consequently allows the most flexible camera performance.
The PN6 Suriu
ut
Three models of Pneumatic -Balance Pedestals are available: (1) The Model PN6 -29 standard Pneumatic -Balance
Pedestal; (2) the Model PN6 -29B Pneumatic Pedestal with
Brake; and (3) Model PN6 -33B Pneumatic Color Pedestal
with Brake. The PN6 -29 and PN6 -29B camera pedestals
may be used with either vidicon or image orthicon mono-
chrome camera equipment. The heavier type PN6 -33B has
been especially designed for color cameras.
The Pneumatic -Balance
Camera Pedestal incorporates a
closed air system reservoir. The camera mount is on a
piston which rides in a cylinder on a cushion of compressed air. An encircling reservoir provides the storage
space for excess air when the camera is at the lower
heights. The spring -like effect of the compressed air on
the piston results in a practically weightless camera load.
Addition of air may be made through the use of an
ordinary tire pump, a transfer bottle, or a compressor.
The Pneumatic -Balanced Pedestal
flexible lightweight
unit. In addition to the counter -balanced action on the
elevation adjustment, the pedestal is easily moved about
the studio by a single camera operator. It is equipped
with ball- bearing, rubber -tired wheels providing silent,
smooth and effortless movement. Cable guards act as
pushers on any cables that may be in the line of travel.
Due to the fact that there is practically no loss in the
62
closed air system, replenishment of the air supply in the
pedestal is seldom needed. In case of a change of camera
load, the pressure in the system is readily compensated.
Models PN6 -29B and PN6 -33B are equipped with a solenoid operated brake mechanism to lock the pedestal at
any desired height. The brake is released
switch which is mounted on the handle
cradle head. A large wheel base and
steering wheel make the PN6 -33B Model
able for color television cameras.
by operating a
of the camera
larger diameter
especially suit-
SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Air Pressure Requirements, P.S.I.
weight of cornera load
Can be repositioned anywhere in
360
circle by lifting "T" handle on corner
Wheels
rubber tired, ball bearing with Alemite grease fittings
PN6 -29
PN6 -298
PN6 -338
Net Weight
175 lbs.
185 lbs.
210 lbs.
Shipping Weight
215 lbs.
225 lbs.
250 lbs.
Height (excluding head) max
501/2"
501/2"
501/2"
Height (excluding head) min
301/2"
301/2"
301/2"
Wheel Base (center to center)
29"
29"
33"
Base Width Max.
341/2"
341/2"
371/2"
Base Width Min.
293/4"
293/4"
323/4"
Electric Column Brake
Available Included Included
Base Position
as kit
A -C Power
Requirement'
is a
None
117 v.
60 cps.
0.75 amps.
Or
220 v.
50 cps.
0.75 amps.
117 v.
60 cps.
0.75 amps
or
220 v.
50 cps.
0.75 amps.
Accessories
Air Compressor
Monochrome Cradle Head
Color Cradle Head
*Specify A -C line voltage and frequency when ordering.
PN -100
MI-26203 -A
MI -40824
CAMERA MOUNTS
Metal Tripod
TYPE TD -11A
FEATURES
Three -point leg bracing with
individual tie rods and sturdy
center post assure rigidity
and stability
Light in weight
in design
yet rugged
into small, compact,
package for
carrying
Folds
self -locking
Leg length calibration aids
in accurate positioning and
adjusting
Attractively finished in deep
umber gray wrinkle and hard
chrome
D
E S C
R
I
P T I
O N
The Type TD -11A tripod is designed to support all types
of RCA television studio and field cameras (with fric-
tion head Ml- 26205 -B, or cradle heads Ml- 26203 -A and
Ml- 40824). When used with television tripod dolly type
TD -15A, it provides a maximum of cor.venience and
mobility for dallying operations.
The Type TD-11A consists of an all -metal tripod structure
of aluminum castings and tubular steel construction which
provides a compact, lightweight, yet rugged design. It folds
into a small -size unit which is easily portable. When collapsed for carrying, legs are latched to the center stabilizing post, thus preventing leg spread during transport.
operation the TD -11A provides a "working- height" range
of approximately 25 to 42 inches. Outstanding in design
are individual tie rods which connect to and brace all
tripod legs (these same three tie rods also couple to the
center stabilizing post and provide a stable, rigid support)
In
clamp screws. Calibration numbers are engraved on the lower legs to simplify
leveling. The lower end of each leg is provided with a
self-aligning, universally- mounted casting, which in one
plane has a flat surface for use on level flooring -and in
another plane has a steel spike for use on rough surfaces.
The flat surface also provides a suitable mounting for use
with Tripod Dolly, TD -15A.
in position by means of hand -operated
SPECIFICATIONS
Recommended Operating
Minimum
Maximum
Heights.
Diameter at Feet (legs extended)
Dimensions (folded for transport):
Overall Height (legs collapsed)
Overall Diameter
Net Weight
tubular portion of each leg
easily adjusted
and slides within a long- length bearing which is held to
close tolerances. Thus, minimum play and maximum rigidity
are assured throughout the working range. When tripod
legs are adjusted for desired height, they may be locked
70
315/W
10"
25 lbs.
Ordering Information
Type TD -11A Metal Tripod
The lower
421
MI -26046
is
Accessories
Color Camera Cradle Head
Monochrome Camera Cradle Head
Tripod Dolly, Type TD -15A
Ml -40824
MI.26203 -A
MI.26042 -A
CAMERA MOUNTS
Tripod Dolly
TYPE TD -15A
FEATURES
Provides mobility
camera mounting
for
tripod
Folds into compact lightweight
self -locking portable package
\\
Large diameter 5 -inch wheels
permit easy movement
y
Wheel stops provide for locking tripod in position
Tripod locks firmly to dolly
D
The
TD -15A
Tripod Dolly
TD -11A Tripod
is
E
S C R
designed for use with the
fitted with television cameras. When tripods
I
P T
I
O N
tripod, it occupies
The
dolly
is
a
circular area 57 inches
in
diameter.
fastened firmly to the tripod by a clamp at
very often the case, use of tho
each leg. Spring -loaded stop feet at each wheel serve
dolly precludes any possibility of marring the floor, and
to hold the tripod in a fixed position. Wheels may be re-
provides greater mobility for the tripod. Used in the field
moved readily if such should be required.
are used indoors, which
is
with reasonably flat terrain, the dolly makes it convenient
and easy to change the position of the tripod.
As each wheel
is
on a swivel, the course can be easily
Dolly consists of a lightweight triangular -
changed by merely pushing in the proper direction. Caster
shaped steel structure supported on three swivel wheels,
locking devices at each wheel make it possible to lock two
The TD -15A
hard chrome. For con-
or all three wheels in a parallel position, encbling the dolly
venience in transporting, the dolly folds into a package
to track in a straight line for rolling dolly shots, closely
by 14 by 29 inches. When extended and fastened to the
simulating results obtained with more expensive equipment.
five inches in diameter. The finish
8
is
SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions (unfolded and extended):
Height (to mounting surface for tripod legs)
Diameter
6"
57"
TD
-15A Tripod folded
for
carrying.
Folded for Transport:
Height
Width
8"
14"
29"
Length
Net Weight
251/2 lbs.
Ordering Information
Type
64
TD -15A
Tripod Dolly
Ml- 26042 -A
,*21I2
CAMERA MOUNTS
Vidicon Camera Mounting Equipment
DESCRIPTION
FEATURES
Lightweight and sturdy
RCA Vidicon
Camera Mounting
a Type TDC -10
Pan and
tilt head spring loaded to balance
up to 85 -pound camera weight
Equipment, consisting of
Dolly, TDC -20 Cornera Tripod, and TDC -
30 Balanced Pan and Tilt Head,
is
closed- circuit television applications
designed for use in
with
cameras such
Large 5 -inch wheels for smooth dollying
as the RCA Type TK -15 Vidicon Studio Camera.
Indexed wheel bases provide positive positioning of wheels for accurate dolly movement and tracking
Each unit of mounting equipment has been designed to
Units easily disassembled and folded for
transportation or storage
provide excellent maneuverability and serviceability for
indoor and
outdoor applications. This equipment fully
meets the educational
and industrial closed circuit de-
mands whether in classroom, studio or the field.
CAMERA MOUNTS
The TDC -10 Dolly, MI- 26200, consists of a lightweight,
triangular shaped aluminum structure supported on three
swivel wheels. It
aluminum tubing
is
made of satin chrome finished cast
11/2
inches in diameter. Large 5 inch
wheels permit smooth dallying. The wheels have a positive
indexing device spaced 120' apart for straight -line operation. The dolly is fastened firmly to the tripod at each leg
by means of yoke clamps. When extended and fastened
to the tripod, it occupies a circular area 42 inches in
diameter.
The TDC -30 Balanced Pan and Tilt Head, MI- 26202, is also
made of cast aluminum alloy with gray wrinkle finish.
It is provided with a
#3/a -16
spring -loaded camera tie -down
screw. The pan and tilt head
is
capable of balancing 70
to 85 pounds of camera weight. Large, separate, pan
and tilt lock and friction levers, and off -set pan handle
are provided for controlling the movement of tilt -head
and camera. A two -way spirit level is provided as part of
the Model TDC -30 to permit accurate leveling of the
camera mounting equipment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Tripod:
Operating Heights (when mounted on dolly):
Minimum
Maximum
Operating diameter (Legs extended)
folded dimensions
Weight
36"
531/a"
39"
91/2" dia. by 343/4" long
16 lbs.
Dolly:
Dimensions (unfolded and extended):
TK -15 Vidicon Studio Camera shown mounted on the TDC -10 Dolly,
TDC -20 Camera Tripod and TDC -30 Balance Pan and Tilt Head.
91/4"
Height (overall)
Height to Tripod Legs
Diameter
Wheels
8"
42" approx.
5" dia.
Dimensions (folded for transport):
91/4"
Height
Width
The Type TDC -20 Vidicon Camera Mounting Tripod, MI-
fabricated of finished maple and cast aluminum
alloy clamps to provide a compact, lightweight, yet rugged support for camera equipment weighing up to 85
26201,
is
pounds. The tripod can be varied in height from 36 to
531/4 inches. After tripod legs are adjusted for desired
height, they may be locked in position by means of hand -
operated, clamp grips. The tripod
is
91/2
291/2"
Length
16 lbs.
Weight
Head:
3600
Angle of rotation
Top Plate
71
Tie Down Screw..
Height
Base Diameter
Spring Load (to balance cameras)
Weight
%y" long by 6v/e" wide
x3/8 "-16
8"
7"
70 to 85 lbs.
22 lbs.
provided with stand-
ard tripod feet which offer firm support whether used with
or without a dolly. It folds into a small -size unit approximately
111 /4"
inches in diameter by 343/4 inches long.
Ordering Information
Type TDC -20 Vidicon Camera Mounting Tripod
Type TDC -10 Dolly
Type TDC -30 Balanced Pan and Tilt Head
Ml -26201
Ml -26200
Ml -26202
CAMERA MOUNTS
Television Camera Cradle
Heads
MI -40824 and MI- 26203 -A
FEATURES
New ease of camera operation
Accurate balance
Rugged construction
Adapted to fit all standard tripods, pedestals, dollies, cranes or hi -hats
No counterbalancing springs to get out of
adjustment or to produce noise
Color Camera Cradle Head, MI -40824
DESCRIPTION
The MI -40824 Cradle Head
is
designed especially for use
with the RCA Color Image Orthicon Cameras, while the
MI- 26203 -A Cradle Head
is
specified for the Monochrome
Image Orthicon Cameras. The Color Cradle Head fits all
standard heavy duty pedestals, dollies, cranes, tripods
or hi -hats, and the Monochrome Cradle Head
may be
used with the same units as well as the TD -7A Lightweight
Camera Pedestal,
and lightweight Mounting Adaptors.
The cradles provide a new balance and ease of camera
operation. When the camera
cradle rotates around
a
is
tilted up or down, the
constant center of gravity, main-
taining absolute balance at all times. There are no counterbalancing springs to get out of adjustment or to oroduce
noise. Panning action
as the
is
accomplished with the same ease
tilt action due to precision ball bearing construction.
The heads have special
flexibility for both studio or out-
door camera operation.
Sturdy rigid aluminum castings are used for all major
parts of the new Monochrome and Color TV Camera
Cradle Heads to provide and maintain accurate alignment. Separate cradle tracks allow for replacement
in
case of damage. The new mountings feature perfect bal-
ance around a constant center of gravity when tilting or
panning.
The camera with all accessories attached, can be balanced
perfectly when mounted on the head without loosening
the camera hold -down screws. This is accomplished by
moving the top camera plate on the head forward or back
with a lead screw.
4
Monochrome Camera Cradle Head, MI- 26203A
CAMERA MOUNTS
Tilting
is
controlled by an adjustable handle, which comes
mounted with the Monochrome Model. The Color Cradle
Head
is
controlled by the camera handle itself. Four
service lubrication for the life of the unit.
ment
is
Drag adjust -
provided on the tilt. Brakes on the pan and tilt
quickly lock the camera
in a
fixed position.
phenolic -coverer' ball bearing rollers mounted in the base
of the head support the cradle. The cradle tracks ride on
these
SPECIFICATIONS
bearings, providing smooth, quiet operation. The
head tilts down 38 degrees and up 30 degrees. Stop blocks
Monochrome
Cradle Head
prevent the cradle from riding off the bearings at the
extreme limits of travel. The amount of drag on the tilt
is
controlled by
a
convenient knob, provided with a vernier
differential screw for fine adjustment.
Panning action
is
accomplished by two precision ball bear-
ings in the base of the head which carry the vertical load.
All ball bearings are of the sealed type and require no
Color
Cradle Head
Angle of Rotation
360
Top Plate
67'e" wide
Height
Ti"
10' 'z"
Weight
26 lbs.
55 lbs.
Shipping Weight
45 lbs.
90 lbs.
Finish
Umber gray
Umber gray
360
x
5" long
12" wide
x
14" long
Ordering Information
Cradle Head
..
MI- 26203 -A
MI -40824
Cradle heads provide flexibility for both studio or outdoor operation,
and they fit all standard pedestals, dollies, cranes, tripods or hihats.
68
B.2117
CAMERA MOUNTS
Shock Mounts
For RCA Field Television Equipment
FEATURES
Afford added life and protection to field
television equipment
Barry type mounts absorb harmful shock
and vibration
Sturdily constructed of stainless steel
Protective cadmium plated finish
Equipment slides into place with added ease
DESCRIPTION
Shock mounts are available for use with all RCA Field
chassis shock mountings are
TV Camera
Equipment. These mounts are designed to
steel with Barry -type rubber mounts grounded to the frame
protect the camera chain from harmful shock and vibra-
by flexible strap or similar means. All steel fasteners and
tion during transportation and normal field usage. The
parts other than stainless steel are protectively plated with
Ml -26511 Series mounting bases are individually designed
cadmium. Two spring -loaded index pins grip the equip-
for use with Field Camera Controls, Switchers, Power Supplies, Sync Generator Units, Processing Amplifiers, etc.
ment through holes in the rear of the chassis, while lock
A variety of slide -type mounting racks with Barry-type
Each mount is
rubber shock mounts able to withstand loads up to 50
and has four .234 -inch diameter mounting holes spaced
pounds each are carried in different base sizes to accom-
1'3'íe
modate all Field Television Camera Equipment units. The
1/4
made of .063 -inch stainless
down clamps bolt the equipment into place from the front
so
that the equipment
23/8
is
securely lashed down at all times.
inches square by
1
-17/32 inches high
inches apart. The shock mounts accommodate the
-inch diameter clamping thumbscrews.
SPECIFICATIONS AND ORDERING INFORMATION
Stock
Identification
Overall
length
Used With
MI. 26511 -3
TK -14 Field Cornera
MI- 26511 -Al
TK-14
TY -31
Free
Heiyht'
Mountings
Loading
'"
1%"
4- rubber
285fá'
96"
113,f6"
4- rubber
13 -31 lbs.
23
Feld Camera Control,
TG -12 Sync Generator
Inside
Width
¡e'
Field Power Supply,
9
20-48
lbs.
MI- 26511 -A3
TM -35 Portable Master
20-5/32"
9V
1.13/32'
4- rubber
13 -31 lbs.
MI-26511 -A5
WP -16 Portable Power Supply in Field Case
28-29/32"
974x'
1. 13/32"
4- rubber
13 -31 lbs.
MI-26511-A6
TK-60 Field Processor
25-13/32"
9746'
1. 13/32'
4- rubber
13
Free
Monitor
height from mounting surface to bottom of equipment.
-31
lbs.
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Electro-Magnetic Orbiters
For Monochrome Image Orthicon Cameras
FEATURES
Orbiting movement so steady it
undetectable by viewer
Adds new life to image orthicon tubes
by minimizing "burn -in"
Equipment mounts inside camera without
affecting normal operation or appearance
is
Greatly cuts tube cost -orbiter soon
pays for itself
Separate remote control requires no
additional wires to camera
Orbiting Cycle one minute
USES
RCA's series of Electro- Magnetic Orbiters are designed to
prevent "burn -in" and increase the life of image orthicon
tubes used in standard monochrome type television corn eras. The equipment, which mounts inside the cameras
without affecting normal operation or appearance, causes
a slow continuous eliptical movement of the image approximately five percent of picture height on the photosensitive surface of the tube. Operating at about one
revolution per minute such motion is not apparent to the
viewer yet is sufficient to prevent sticking or "burn -in."
The control unit for the monochrome orbiter permits remote
operation from the control position, utilizing wires already
available in the camera cable.
Image orthicon tubes are often retired from operation
because of "burn -in" damage even though the other
characteristics which affect picture quality have not deteriorated. The installation of an RCA Electro- Magnetic
Orbiter will allow many of these tubes to be returned to
service.
There are several types of monochrome yoke assemblies
in present -day studio TV cameras, so it is important when
ordering the Electro- Magnetic Orbiter to state the type
of camera in which the equipment is to be used. The following equipment is specified for RCA type cameras:
MI -26850 26853/26857
for
TK -11
31
Series
for
TK -10
30
Series Mono-
Mono-
chrome Cameras
MI -26851 26853/26857
chrome Cameras
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
FROM
ORSTNG
DESCRIPTION
The RCA Electro- Magnetic Orbiters for monochrome tele-
GENERATOR
AUG,
INTERCOM
vision cameras employ a suitable deflection coil placed
over the image section of the image orthicon tube and
excited by appropriate currents to make possible a non mechanical method of orbiting the target charge image
in its translation from the photocathode to the target. The
equipment consists of two parts, the deflection coil for
the image section and a generator chassis for producing
the required exciting currents. The generator is supplied
on a rack -mounting adaptor, but it may be removed for
C
CAMERA CONTROL
CAMERA CABLE
CAMERA
Almw
cHO+E
mounting elsewhere.
ORINTRIG
COLS
GI GI
TO
EARPHONE
The orbiter coil is of dual toroidal construction to make it
as thin as possible. The core is a thin section of either mu-
metal laminations or iron wire wrap depending on type
camera on which it is to be used. The mu -metal core in the
case of the external coil for TK -11 31 camera preserves
the continuity of the mu -metal shielding over the focus
coil. The iron wire core for the internal coil for TK -10 30
Series Cameras presents a high -reluctance path for the
focus field and hence does not disturb the normal magnetic focus fields within the image section of the tube.
The dual toroidal coils are arranged in quadrature about
the image section of the yoke assembly. The coil is driven
from a small generating assembly, located at the control
position, which contains a geared down motor driving a
selsyn generator. The output of the selsyn consists of two 60
cps currents, one modulated with a 1 cycle -per- minute sine
wave and the other with a 1 cycle -per- minute cosine wave.
These waveforms are demodulated to produce two 1 cycle per- minute currents 90 degrees out of phase.
.ACHS
Cable circuit schematic.
the intercommunication
circuits in the camera cable. A phantom circuit is employed
to avoid interference with the intercommunication function.
The dual coils are fed through
resultant magnetic field produced by the current
through these coils slowly rotates and slightly deflects the
electron image from its normal travel between the photocathode and the target. Since all of the "burn -in" takes
place at the target, this prevents "sticking" as well as orbiting the optical image on the photo- cathode. The small
amount of orbiting and the slow rate used make the effect
unnoticeable by the viewer. Interconnecting cable, MI13333, is required for connecting the generator unit and
camera control. A modification kit, Ml -26857 is required
at the camera control.
The
Schematic of image orthicon focus assembly showing location
of internal and external orbiting coils.
MU- METAL
SPECIFICATIONS
SHIELD
Power Requirements
FOCUS COIL
DEFLECTION
COIL
Orbiting Cycle
Orbiting Deflection
ORBITING
COIL
Generator Dimensions (excluding rack mounting adapter):
-
8"
Length
Width
Height
Weight
Rack Mounting Adopter Height
MU- METAL
IMAGE-
117 volts, 60 cycles,
single phase 8 watts
I minute
5% picture height (approx.)
ORBITER GENERATOR
IMAGE
ORTHICON
ORTHICON
c
SHIELD
11"""`7
31/4"
5"
Approx. 5 lbs.
51/4"
Ordering Information
Electro Magnetic Orbiter Coil for TK -11 /31 Series
Monochrome Cameras
MI-26850 -A
Electro Magnetic Orbiter Coil for TK-10/30 Series
Monochrome Cameras
MI- 26851 -A
Electro- Magnetic Orbiter Generator
Modification Kit for Camera Controls
Ml -26853
MI -26857
Accessories
Interconnecting Cable (required accessory, supplied in bulk,
specify length when ordering)
MI -13333
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Neutral Density Filter Slide Mechanism
FOR TYPE TK -40A
and TK -41 COLOR CAMERAS
L1
FEATURES
100 to 1. By selecting neutral density filters
(values of
1.0 to 2.0 supplied), all light ranges normally encountered
Neutral density filters compensate for large
variations of light level
can be handled. The Ml -40528 slide mechanism kit
Permits operation of image orthicons at
optimum signal to noise ratio
The Ml -40528 Neutral Density Filter Slide Mechanism
Filters accommodated by convenient and
easy to operate slide mechanism
Instantaneous change from
control
rear
camera
Compensation does not affect color
DESCRIPTION
The Neutral Density Filter Slide Mechanism, MI- 40528, pro-
vides a useful means of controlling large variations of
light levels for RCA TK -40A and TK -41 Color TV Cameras.
The remote iris control in the camera lens can handle
without difficulty;
variations of light levels up to 30 to
however, during the televising of outdoor events in color
where daylight is the light source, the variation of incident
illumination levels can be expected to vary as much as
1
is
easily
installed in RCA color TV cameras.
is
provided as a kit of parts consisting of a brass slide assembly, three hard -brass filter holders, two rails of sturdy
brass bar, two beryllium copper springs, steel control shaft,
a black plastic control knob, lever assembly, three vertical
compensation shields and mounting hardware. The kit may
be easily installed in the optical path common to the three
color image orthicon tubes. Complete instructions are
furnished with the equipment.
Two neutral density filters, with values of 1.0 and 2.0 density respectively, are provided with the slide mechanism.
They may be inserted into two of the three filter holders.
When installed the slide mechanism is easily operated
from the rear of the camera by turning the control knob
to any of three positions. The central position may be
used to provide normal illumination, while a turn to the
left or the right instantly provides the required amount of
compensation from the two filters.
Ordering Information
Neutral Density Filter Slide Mechanism
MI-40528
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
NEUTRAL DENSITY FILTER HOLDERS
FOR TK -11/31
and TK -14
SERIES CAMERAS
DESCRIPTION
The Neutral Density Filter Holder for TK -11
31
and TK -14
Series Cameras, Ml- 26847, provides a useful means for
holding a neutral density filter in front of the image orthicon face plate to reduce the light level reaching the image
orthicon. One filter attenuates the light equally for all
lenses on the turret. This is especially useful outdoors where
there is no control of lighting and the iris on the lenses
cannot be stopped down sufficiently.
Ml -26857 consists of a single phosphor -bronze filter holder
with two tines for snapping the filter into position on the
bakelite mask immediately in front of the face of the image
orthicon tube. Two filters are provided with neutral density
values of 1.0 and 2.0 respectively.
Ordering Information
Neutral Density Filter Holder
MI-26847
PLATE CURRENT METER
MI- 21200 -C1
age and total output current of these power supplies, and
for measuring the focus coil current in RCA Image Orthicon Camera Equipment. The 0 -150 ma scale is used for
these metering functions. By pressing the button on the
meter panel, the 0 -15 ma scale can be used to measure
the signal level calibration voltage in the TM -6C Master
Monitor. The proper external shunts are included in each
of the equipments with which the meter is used.
SPECIFICATIONS
Range Scales
0 -150 ma., 0 -15 ma.
Approximate Size
35/2" x
Net Weight
DESCRIPTION
Plate current Meter, MI- 21200-C1, is a two scale meter
for checking the plate currents drawn by the regulator
tubes in RCA Power Supplies Types WP -15, WP -33, 580 -D
and TY -31. It also is used for measuring the output volt-
W6""
x 21/2"
3 lbs.
Finish
Bakelite case
Cable
5' 9" cord with plug -in jack
Ordering Information
Plate Current Meter
MI- 21200 -C1
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Television Test Charts
/
O
. o . 01
00000BOOO
o
0
O
c
o
O O BO
o
O
O O O O O ODO O O O ODO
4
3
6 E 7
O
O
0 0 0 0
O O O O O
o
O
0
.
ó
9
0-0 0
0-,0
7
6
Q
o
a
E
13
11
F
O OGO
O OHO
0O
9
0000K000
Q
1 0
O
8
II
12
J
O OKO
OLINEARITYORTMAO CHART
O O O O O OMO
10
ó
y
O
y
O O O OMO
o v o
y
HA Linearity Chart, MI-26822
EIA Resolution Chart, MI. 26822.2.
1
DESCRIPTION
EIA Television Test Charts offer a quick, convenient and
reliable means of making live camera adjustments. By
using these standard checks, telecasters have an accurate
and objective method of evaluating picture quality of IO
or Vidicon cameras. Test charts for both monochrome and
color operation are available from RCA.
EIA Linearity Chart
The Linearity Chart, MI- 26822 -1, provides a standardized,
precise method of measuring television scanning linearity.
It is designed for use with an electrical grating generating
test pattern which provides an accurate visual reference
for comparison with the scanned image of the chart.
The chart has an aspect ratio of 3 by 4 and is designed
to be scanned to its boundaries as indicated by the arrows.
The pattern consists of circles arranged in 14 horizontal
rows and 17 vertical rows. The inside diameter of each
circle is equivalent to 2 per cent of picture height, and
the outside diameter is equivalent to 4 per cent of picture
height. A grating pattern from a source such as the grating generator output of the TG -2A Synchronizing Generator is superimposed electrically upon the video signal
produced by scanning the linearity chart. Observation of
the relative position of each circle with respect to the
grating bars thus permits measurement of scanning linearity within an accuracy of 1 per cent of picture height.
Ordering Information
MI-26822-1
EIA Resolution Chart
EIA Resolution Chart is designed to provide a
standard reference for measuring resolution of television
cameras and as an aid in testing for streaking, ringing, interlace, shading, scanning linearity, aspect ratio,
and gray scale reproduction. The horizontal resolution obThe
tained from many camera chains is often limited by the
resolving capabilities of the camera tube and not by the
bandwidth of the video amplifiers employed. Therefore,
much useful information concerning the limiting resolution
percentage response at various line numbers, and degradation of resolution with aging of camera tubes can be
obtained from a test chart containing a high number of
lines. Thus the horizontal and vertical wedges of the chart
are arranged to permit resolution measurements from
200 to 800 lines. The reflection density of the various
steps of the "paste on" gray scales supplied with the chart
are very accurately maintained in the manufacturing process. Arranged in ten steps, the scales cover a contrast
range of approximately 30 to 1. The steps are arranged
in logarithmic decreasing values of reflectance so that the
difference in reflection density between adjacent steps is
equal to 0.16.
Ordering Information
MI- 26822 -2
EIA Registration Chart
The EIA Registration Chart is used to adjust and check
multiple color pickup devices for combined optical,
mechanical and electrical registration, so that the output
signals are in correct time relationship. The chart contains
a ruled grid pattern to aid in adjusting height, width, rotation, skew, centering and linearity in each channel. The
ruled grid pattern also serves to indicate any "S" distortion
or bowing. The additional parallel lines about the edges
are to allow for finer adjustments of the individual line
arities in areas of the raster where the most difficulty is
likely to occur in matching the time relationship of the scans.
-
The arrowheads pointing to the edges may be used
for
adjusting the amount of scan to a 3 by 4 aspect ratio.
The circles are included to indicate readily that corresponding lines are being registered, and that centering
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
K
O
\.
.,\\O/I MM
1 I
ÁoN1
M::1!;
\\I
.oI/
1/ii\OO//i
fiN.!
\:C
1111
11
EMI
11
1
11U.
1--irMAMOM u
`IA
-
1rl
4L'L7:I4S
H
EIA Registration Chart, MI-26822-3.
not displaced by one complete line with
respect to the others. A horizontal and vertical resolution
wedge is provided for fine adjustment of centering. The
45 degree radial lines will often indicate misregistration
not easily detected from the ruled grid pattern.
of one channel
is
Ordering Information
05
10
MI-26822-3
15
20
25
30
35
40
comparative evaluation in percentage of the response of
the groups as measured on an oscilloscope.
Ordering Information
IB-31605
EIA Linear Reflectance Chart
The Linear Reflectance Chart provides a standard refer-
ence for the measurement and adjustment of the transfer
characteristics of monochrome and color TV cameras. This
chart has a pair of linear gray scales running in opposite directions placed a short distance apart on a uniform gray background. Nine chips ranging from white
to black provide information on reflectance, Munsell value
and reflection density. A reflectance of 60 per cent was
chosen for the white chip, since it approximates the reflectance of the brightest object in the scene with present
studio lighting practice. The contrast range of 20 to
was chosen because it has been found to cover the most
useful "linear" luminance input range of an image orthicon when used for color reproduction. The crossed gray
scales allow a distinction to be made readily between
distortion due to poor transfer characteristics and those
due to shading errors.
1
Ordering Information
MI- 26822-4
EIA Logarithmic Reflectance Chart
The EIA Logarithmic Reflectance Chart provides a standard
II
1.0
.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
35
40
MEGACYCLES
RCA Burst Chart
The RCA Burst Chart provides an accurate means of meas-
ing the aperture response of a live TV camera system.
The burst chart has 8 groups of alternate black and white
bars. The number of black and white transitions in each
group are such that when the chart is properly scanned an
indication of 0.5, 1.0, 1.5, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0, 3.5 and 4.0 megacycle response is obtained. The aperture response is a
EIA Linear Reflectance Chart, MI.26822 -4.
reference for the measurement and adjustment of the
transfer characteristics of monochrome and color TV cameras. This chart consists of a pair of gray scales running in
opposite directions placed a short distance apart on a
uniform gray background. The reflectance values of the
lightest and darkest chips are similar to those of the
Linear Reflectance Chart. However, the nine chips of the
logarithmic chart are scaled to provide equal percentage
steps between reflectance values of consecutive chips. The
logarithmic step pattern is of value in setting up monochrome TV cameras for optimum performance on the nonlinear portion of the pickup tube transfer characteristic.
Ordering Information
MI-26822-5
EIA Logarithmic Reflectance Chart, MI. 26822.5
r
j
8.2128
HA LINEAR REHKTANCE CHART
F
LOGARITHMIC REfLECTANCE CHART
v
75
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Television Diascope
FEATURES
Projects
2
by
2
inch test slides or captions
directly upon I.O. camera tube
Precision 39mm focal length f 4.5
anastigmat coated lens
Light intensity may be adjusted
Standard double 2 by 2 inch slide holder
aligned on camera turret
Facilitates initial adjustment of cameras
and associated equipment
DESCRIPTION
The Watson Barnet Model 251
a useful test
The slides are inserted into a standard double 2 x 2 slide
or programming device intended to be mounted on the
holder which is properly aligned by a locating pin on the
camera turret that engages a slot in the Diascope mount
ing collar. By this means, orientation of the slide image
is correct with respect to the photocathode.
Diascope
is
turret of an image orthicon television camera in place of
the normal taking lens to project an image of a test pattern
or caption from a 2 -inch by 2 -inch slide directly upon the
photocathode of the camera tube. The camera and associated equipments may be adjusted or tested by projecting
the appropriate test slide. The Diascope
is also an excellent
device for programming slides where a film projector is
not available for slide requirements.
The Diascope may be mounted on the turret of a 4' 2 -inch
I.O. live TV camera in place of one of the normal fixed
focus lens. Projection is achieved by a precision 39mm
focal length f 4.5 anastigmat lens with coated components
designed to enlarge the 1.4 diagonal of the 2 -inch by
2 -inch slide picture area to fill the 1.6 -inch diagonal of the
photocathode surface. Lens performance is capable of projecting with good definition an opaque line .001
wide with .001 inch spaces.
76
inch
The illumination system for the slide comprises a 12 volt,
watt Mazda No. 209 lamp, a condensing lens and a
ground glass screen. The light intensity may be adjusted
by means of a rheostat mounted in the end of the Diascope. The mounting collar has two contacts for supplying
voltage to the Diascope from a source within the camera.
6
turret has mating contacts for the
Diascope and supplies power to the lamp from a variable
0 to 12 volt power source within the camera. The variable
0 -12 volt power source is adjusted by the iris control knob
at the camera or remote position provided the appropriate
The TK -60A camera
switch on the camera
is
placed in the "diascope" mode of
operation.
Ordering Information
Watson
Barnet Diascope
Model 251
8.2130
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Interphone
Equipment
FEATURES
E-SHELF MI-11735
INTERPHONE
CONNECTION
Production intercom with studio personnel
or remote line as desired
UNIT
MI-11784
Can mount to console, desk, or wall
SINGLE
HEADBAND
ASSEMBLY
MI -11743
Designed to be compatible with other RCA
TV
equipment
RETARDATION
FAN EL
COIL
Transistor amplifier or induction coil type
interconnection units available
/MI- 11736-A
MI -11737
Regulated power supply
DESCRIPTION
RCA Interphone Equipment is designed to provide con-
venient line switching and headset connection facilities for
a TV camera and studio communication system.
Heart of the RCA Interphone System is the Interphone
Connection Unit. Two types of connection units are available. The MI -11784 Transistor Interconnection Unit must
be used with RCA TK -60 and other late model Cameras having transistorized intercommunication systems built
into the camera. The MI -11734 Intercom Interconnection
unit is designed for use with early RCA studio and field
type cameras. The two interconnection units can not be
intermixed in a system.
The MI -11784 unit includes a single stage transistor ampli-
fier, with bridge rectifier and sidetone compensation network with level control to adjust volume. Each person on
the talking bus can adjust the volume to suit his individual
requirement. On the front is a three -way switch for selection of three intercom lines, and the separate volume controls for "phone" and "cue" adjustment. The box also
contains two jacks to accommodate single or double headsets. A 9 -pin and a 12 -pin cable connector plug on the
rear are used for external connection. The entire unit is
housed in a box 45/e inches wide,
inches deep overall.
21/2
inches high and
63/4
Operating power for the MI -11784 interphone unit is derived from the common -battery interphone circuit to which
the interphone unit is connected. A bridge -rectifier is interposed in the line to the amplifier to maintain correct
polarity at the amplifier regardless of the polarity of the
interphone battery voltage. The sidetone compensation
bridge is designed to hold the sidetone level to within 2
db of the received level for any number of connected
stations up to 32.
The Transistor Interphone Connection Unit, MI -11784 can
replace the MI -11734 unit where it is designed to modernize the system since the unit physically replaces the MI-
11734 Connection Unit and will operate with virtually all
commercially available TV headsets using carbon microphones. The substitution can be made only if the camera
is modified by substituting an MI -11757 Transistor Amplifier for the induction coil in the interphone circuit. Other
circuit changes as outlined in the instruction book are also
required.
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
The Interphone Connection Unit, MI- 11734, consists of a
simple circuit having an induction coil and capacitor to
provide an anti -sidetone feature. The circuit is housed in
a compact box having two phone jacks for use either with
single or double headset as required, and a two -position
toggle switch for selecting a local circuit or a remote line.
A cable plug is mounted in the rear. It is designed to work
in early intercom systems employing induction coils
throughout.
a
All other components of the Interphone System are designed for operation with either Interconnection Unit.
The Retardation Coil, MI- 11737, permits simultaneous use
of four carbon microphones such as one interphone connection unit and three camera headsets on a common battery
or power supply. The coil permits a d -c power voltage to
be imposed upon the two -wire telephone talking line. The
MI -11737 is an audio frequency choke which isolates the
power supply from the telephone line at voice frequencies.
MI.11784 Transistor Interphone Unit
MI- 11736 -A Mounting Panel is recommended for
mounting retardation coils. The panels have standard
mounting dimensions for use in the RCA BR -84 Series Racks.
The
The accessory, MI -11735 Shelf,
is
available for mounting
the interphone connection units under the countertops of
console housings on which switching units or camera controls are housed. The plate will accommodate one or two
Interphone Connection Units.
Either a single or double headset identified as Single
Headband Assembly, MI -11743 and Double Headband
Assembly, MI- 11744, can be used with RCA Interphone
Equipment. One earphone unit of the double headband
assembly is used for "cue" reception. Either type can be
used in the same system.
Double Headband Assembly, MI.11744
Front and rear view of Induction Coil Interphone Unit, MI-11734.
78
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
.
Y
0.
lu
>
>
u
I
1
N3
OObc,wj
O7CI-0ö01
3N11
1107
E
9,2
'41
000
f-
iNtl CI
NOwW07=1
1N7
A,1
We001
1...40
Jo
O.
3f.I
Yr`A110L
H
mikumminam==
imcdomumin
".^-,-kJQQ.-
a
W
W
z
La
3NI,
E
UO
k-
nl'1
Iç
P
m
ZZ
a
7
4
W
w1
m
O
ry
III
W
¢a
m
$.n
/ .ah
O
d
O
.
E .
li
a
/¢
Ó
F
2
m
A11V1P
O
I-
W
3N11C
3NI1oOben
aobeu
d 1107
_J
1-
W
m W
1107n
NOWWO7
IN 3l1Jn
on 3n7ry
2
p
ONnOb7-.
E3NIlÇ..
NO07=
lnW
Z
3N114
All01P
1
3NnOOaCn
:;eso''{L!
,10000bd1y
11 O 7
YI
NOWW07
3n7.1
Ol 3n7N
Iw
ONnOWO-
ciNlln
pp
a.
Z3NI,Q
a
4 á
r.
^_I
NOWW07=
Z
O¢
4
n
a
J
u
YI
a v
F
1ry
Y.I
w
ry
m W
= n
Z3NIlQ
A1,1 P
3NIlm
DNIIOObdh
1
=ado
1101
1p7Y1
NOWWO7
IN 3n7.1
O1 3(17ry
ONn0b9
E3NIlÇI
W
S
P
O
a
,0
ai-
Q
,4
a
al
,0
2
,O
NOWWOJ'
V
rn
a
!YI
1.I
Iry
l7
WC
1.
1
Z F
m
-
Ó
W
LI1
F
NOWW00_
Z
3NIlQ
Ally./
0.4
13,111,0
3nncOben
110;OObe1q
1107 ill
NOlW07
1..
3n7m
013nON
aNh0b9-
;
wq 00
I
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
INTERPHONE
INTER PHONE CONNECTION
UNIT MI.11714
UNIT
I
CONNECTION
MI-11734
A
1
- - -- --I
L
Iota
2
--I
_J
V
L
HEADSET
MI-11744
Ya
CUE LINE
S
(+l
LINE
v°
p
CUE LINE
TB1
(-1
24
3A.
V.
POWER
I
I
SUPPLY
CUE
RETARDATION
I
MI- 11316
LINE
COIL
M1117 37
213t
ri{
/`
I
3
9
6
1
3
9
j4,
CAMERA CONTROL UNIT
e
1
STUDIO CAMtRA
A
J11
-
o
PROD.
I
1
A A A
V°
-
--
M!U 1a41
1
I^o
J
ENG.
I
[1/0\_,D
L_-- _ - _ _ - _ _ _
I
-_
_
,
CAMERA
EQUIPMENT
I
Ail
I
I
J
l'
II
Schematic Diagram for Interphone
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Supply
Single or Double Headset
DC Resistance:
Microphone Switch On
Microphone Switch Off
Inductance at 1000 Cycles:
Microphone Switch On
Microphone Switch Off
Weight:
Single Headband Assembly
Double Headband Assembly
70 ohms approx.
Infinite
70 millihenries approx.
245 millihenries
6 ozs. (less cord)
9 ozs. (less cord)
Input:
MI- 11318
MI- 591318_
Output
Dimensions Overall
Weight
Capacity
Impedance
Weight
Voltage
Current
Dimensions Overall
Weight
ohms
8.5 volts (nominal)
95 ma. (approx.)
45/e" wide, 21/2" high, 63/4" deep
DC
DC
3
lbs.
Interphone Connection Unit, MI -11734
Dimensions Overall
45/a" wide,
Weight
2-3Ç6'
high, 41/4" deep
1
lb., 11 ozs.
Inductance
Maximum Recommended Load Current
136' wide,
Dimensions Overall
Weight
ohms
3.4 millihenries
125 ma d -c
1. 45/64" high, 45/e" deep
16 ozs.
Power Supply, MI -11316
Input
Output
Dimensions Overall
Weight
100 -125 volts,
50/60
Mounts one or two Interphone Connection Units
11" long, 63/e" wide
2 lbs. (approx.)
Retardation Coil Panel
Mounts up to 14 retardation coils
19" wide, 13/4" high
Capacity
Weight
18
ozs.
Ordering Information
165
Resistance
Dimensions
Dimensions
Retardation Coil, MI -11737
DC
25 lbs.
Mounting Shelf
Transistor Interphone Connection Unit, MI -11784
120
100 -130 volts, a -c, 60 cps., single phase, 144 watts
200.260 volts, a -c, 50 cps, single phase, 144 watts
Regulated 24 volts, 6 amps, d-c
19" wide, 51/4" high, 93/4" deep
cps, single phase, 125 watts
Regulated 24 volts, 3 amps. d -c
73/4" wide, 53/4" high, 105% deep
25 lbs.
Transistor Interphone Connection
Interphone Connection Unit
Retardation Coil
Shelf for Mounting MI -11734
Panel (accommodating 14 Retardation Coils)
Single Headband Assembly
Double Headband Assembly
Regulated Power Supply (24 V, D -C, 3 amps) 110 V, A -C
Regulated Power Supply (24 V, D -C, 6 amps) 110 V, A -C
Regulated Power Supply (24 V, D -C, 6 amps) 220 V, A -C
Transistor Amplifier (Replacement for Induction Coil)
-
MI -11784
MI -11734
MI -11737
Ml -11735
MI. 11736 -A
MI-11743
MI -11744
MI-11316
MI -11318
MI-591318
MI -11757
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
TV Cables,
Male
Cable
Plugs, Connectors
Connector, MI-40529-1.
Female Cable Connector, MI. 40529 -2.
FEATURES
DESCRIPTION
RCA television
Cable designs for every broadcast service
either studio or remote
-
cables, plugs and connectors are made
available for inter -connecting the various components of
equipment- studio, control room and remote.
television
Camera, power, pulse, intercom, coax transmission line
for cables and connectors supplied with RCA television equipment avoids unnecessary installation delays
Exact replacements
and
inter -connecting cables with companion connectors
are available as individual items or in groups for use
with various equipment systems. Refer to the individual
equipment catalog sheets to determine which cables are
Various cable lengths and special cables
available as kits
required with specific items of video equipment.
Camera Cables
The multi- conductor, flexible camera cables listed here are
Connectors and bulk cable available
separately or as wired cable assemblies
supplied
male
in
and
convenient lengths complete with necessary
female
connectors.
These
cables
facilitate
making required inter -connections between cameras and
High quality, conservatively rated
connectors and cable used throughout
camera controls. Conductors are stranded and covered
with "color- coded" insulation. An inner shield of tinned
copper braid
Insulations with conservative voltage
ratings and special shields employed
is
provided. Dust caps are provided where
necessary. Outer coverings are of a durable neoprene
compound.
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Camera Cables and Plugs
Ordering
Information
MI-26725-E5
Description
25- Conductor,
Length
neoprene cover, with
straight male and female
With dustcaps.
connectors.
50 feet
MI-26725-E6
Some os above except length.
100 feet
MI-26725-E7
Some as above except length.
200 feet
MI-26725-E9
25- conductor, neoprene cover, with 90°
male and a straight female connector.
50 feet
Ordering
Information
50 feet
Control Cable; 33-conductor, flexible
rubber-covered, shielded and individually color coded with Jones type male
and female connectors.
50 feet
MI-40831-2
Shading Generator Cable; 8- conductor,
rubber-covered, flexible, with Jones type
male and female connectors.
4 feet
MI-40835
Set of Interconnecting
MI-26725-E10
MI-40831-1
Camera Cable Connectors and Accessories
The connectors described below include both the 90 degree and straight
type for use in making up camera cables in any desired length, using
bulk camera cable.
neoprene cover, with 90
degree female and a 90 degree male
connector. With dustcaps.
25- conductor,
Black
M1- 26759 -A21
Straight Male Camera
Cable Connector.
24- contact
MI- 26759 -A22
Straight Female Camera
Cable Connector.
24- contact for use as
cable termination.
MI- 26759 -23
90°
24- contact for use as cable
termination. Designed so
cable enters connector at
90° to axis of contact pins.
MI-40868-2
TK-41C Color Camera Cable. 82-conduc-
Female
Camera
Cable Connector.
90° Male Camera Cable
Connector.
feet
Dustcap for male cable
connector.
feet
50 feet
tor, single cable, vinyl covered flexible,
straight male and female connectors.
MI-40868-3
Same as above except length.
100 feet
MI-40868-4
Same as above except length.
200 feet
coaxial transmission line cable assemblies are made available in
several different convenient lengths as shown in the accompanying
chart. All are durable, vinyl covered, flexible cables with inner conductor and outer shielded conductor.
Ordering
Information
Description
Length
MI-26759-12
Coax Cable Assembly with 2 male plugs
and dustcaps. Impedance, 75 ohms.
7 feet
MI-26759-13
Same as MI- 26759.12.
MI-26759-15
Coax Cable Assembly with 2 male plugs
and dustcaps. Impedance, 75 ohms.
100 feet
MI-26759-59
Coax Cable Assembly with 2 male plugs
and dustcaps. Impedance, 75 ohms.
10 feet
25 feet
a
24- contact
for use as cable
termination. Designed
so
21ßÿ' dia. x 92" deep,
internal thread, with #10
chain and fastener.
dia. 11(6' deep,
internal thread, with #10
chain and fastener.
MI- 26759 -A42
Dustcap for female cable
connector.
21X6"
MI-26759.45
Coaxial Termination.
75 ohm 1 %.
Includes single contact coaxial connector plug, terminal assembly with a 1/2
watt, 75 -ohm resistor.
MI- 26759-48
Straight Female Connector, waterproof jacket.
24-contact for use as micro wave cable termination.
MI- 26759 -49
Gasket for MI- 26759-48.
Buna
MI- 40529 -1
Male connector for color
camera cable.
82- contact,
Coax Cable Assemblies
The
for use as
cable termination.
cable enters connector at
90° to axis of contact pins.
MI- 26759-A41
3
`6.
Lacing Cord.
MI- 26759.24
3
Description
Type
MI- 11719-A
Cables for TK -26
(Camera to Camera Auxiliary):
(a) Camera Cable; 20-conductor, flexible, rubber -covered, shielded, and
individually color coded with rectangular Cannon type male and female connectors.
(b) Coaxial Cable; Type RG -59/U, flexible, rubber -covered.
MI-26759
MI-26759 -22
MI-40529 -2
Female
connector
color cable.
MI- 40529.3
Male
chassis
for
connector.
"N" rubber 1/4"
square with knitted monel
mesh bonded to rubber.
for
use
as
cable termination.
82- contact-same as above.
82-contact, use with a color
camera cable connector.
MI- 40529 -4
Female chassis connector.
Same as above.
MI. 40529 -5
60° Adaptor.
For
All
_4nc)o.A
Kell,,...
nrt..
color
connector.
Kit
cable
chassis
Use with MI- 40529 -1 or 2.
-21
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
1111111111
Sets
of Interconnection Cables
The cables listed below are supplied in groups in accord-
ance with the requirements of the indicated video equipment systems.
MI. 26359, Interconnecting Cables for TK -60 Field Camera Chain
Includes:
MI-26759-58 10 ft., 3- cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Covers
2
7 ft., 7-cond., Pulse Cable with Plugs and Covers
MI-26759-9
MI-26759-46 10 ft., 12- cond., Power Cable with Plugs
2
4 MI-26759-12
7 ft., Transmission Line Cable with Plugs and Covers
MI-26759-59 10 ft., Transmission Line Cable with Plugs and Covers
MI-26759-60 7 ft., 19- cond., Remote Cable with Plugs and Covers
MI-26759-61
10 ft., 9- cond., Interphone Cable with Plugs and
1
1
1
1
Covers
12- Conductor, Power Cable MI. 26759.6 supplied
MI-43201, Interconnecting Cables for TK -14 Field Camera Chain
Includes:
MI- 26759 -2
10 ft., 2- cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI- 26759 -9
7 ft., 8-cond., Pulse Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI- 26759 -11
7 ft., 8-cond., Interphone Cable with Plugs and
with Jones type connectors.
1
1
1
MI-26759-12
MI-26759-62
MI-26759-64
MI-26759-65
Dustcaps
7 ft., Transmission Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
7 ft., 12-cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
7 ft., 15- cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
7 ft., 7- cond., Orbitor Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26730, Interconnecting Cables for TK -31 Field Camera Equipment
Includes:
MI-26759-2
10 ft., 2 -cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26759-7
6 ft., 12 -cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26759-9
7 ft., 8- cond., Pulse Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26759-11 7 ft., 8- cond., Interphone Cable with Plugs and
Power and Control Cables and Plugs
connectors described below are available for use as
replacements for those supplied with RCA television
studio equipment.
The cables and
spare
units or
Ordering
Information
Power Cable Description
Length
feet
MI- 26759 -2
2- conductor,
vinyl covered, flexible with
male plug and female Cannon type connector with dustcap.
10
MI- 26759 -6
12- conductor, vinyl covered,
flexible with
male and female Jones type connectors.
34 inches
MI- 26759.7
12- conductor, vinyl covered,
1
1
1
1
1
MI-26759-12
Dustcaps
7 ft., Co axial Transmission Cable with Plugs and
Dustcaps
MI-26740-A, Interconnecting Cables and Fittings for
TS -30D
Field
Switching Equipment Includes:
MI-26759-2
10 ft., 2- cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26759-7
6 ft., 12- cond., Power Cable with Plugs and Dustcaps
MI-26759-13 25 ft., Coaxial Transmission Cable
MI-26759-15 100 ft., Coaxial Transmission Cable
MI-26759-18 Set of Coaxial Fittings
1
flexible with
6 feet
male and female Cannon type connectors
and dustcaps.
MI- 26759.8
12- conductor, vinyl covered,
flexible with
male and female Jones type connectors.
6 feet
MI- 26759 -41
18- conductor,
vinyl covered, flexible with
male and female Jones type connectors.
4
MI- 26759 -42
12- conductor, vinyl covered,
MI- 26759-46
12- conductor, vinyl covered,
1
1
1
1
MI-26746, Interconnecting Cables for TK -11B and TK -14 Studio Camera
Control Includes:
MI- 26759 -6
34 -inch, 12- cond., Power Cable with Plugs
MI- 26759-14 64 -inch, Coaxial Transmission Line Cable with Plugs
flexible with
male and female Jones type connectors.
feet
S1/2
feet
1
1
flexible with
10 feet
male and female connectors and dustcaps.
Pulse and Interphone Cables
Ordering
Information
Description
Length
MI-26759-9
Pulse
Cable-8-cond., neoprene covered,
flexible with straight male and female
Cannon type connectors and dustcaps.
7 feet
MI-26759-11
Interphone Cable -8- conductor, vinyl covvered, flexible, with male and female
Cannon type connectors and dustcaps.
7 feet
Control Cable (TK -60 Process
Amplifier to Control Panel) 19- conductor
shielded, black vinyl jacket, flexible with
Cannon type male and female connec-
7 feet
MI-26759-60
Remote
MI- 26759 -57
8- conductor,
vinyl covered, flexible with
straight male and 90° female connector.
36 inches
MI-26759-58
3- conductor,
heavy duty Cord type S,
synthetic rubber insulation, with Cannon
type female connector and Hubbell type
3 -wire polarized armored cap (twist- lock).
10 feet
MI-26759-62
and
Interphone Cable -9- conductor, flexible,
shielded, black vinyl jacket non- contaminating, with Cannon type male nad
female connectors and dustcaps.
10 feet
7 feet
MI-26759-64
15- cond., neoprene covered, flexible with
male and female connectors and dustcaps.
7
feet
MI-26759-65
7-cond.,
rubber covered, flexible with
male and female connectors and dustcaps.
7
feet
tors and dustcaps.
MI-26759-61
vinyl covered, flexible with male
female connectors and dustcaps.
12- cond.,
4.41
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Bulk Cable and Accessories
The various cables described in the accompanying table are available to the
broadcaster in bulk quantities for making TV interconnections in special
or nonstandard lengths as desired.
Ordering
Information
MI-43D
MI-48
-
-
8- cond.,
0.300"
0.75"
CABLE -Type
/U, flexible, vinyl
COAXIAL
RG -8
covered. Single
conductor
and
shield conductor.
MI-75
MI-83A
inner
outer
COAXIAL CABLE -Type
RG- 59A /U,
flexible,
vinyl covered. Single inner conductor and outer
shield conductor.
COAXIAL
RG -1
1
A
CABLE -Type
/ U,
0.405"
0.242"
0.405"
vinyl covered. Single inner conductor and outer
shield conductor.
MI-94N
-
CAMERA CABLE
25cond., neoprene- covered,
flexible, color coded,
shielded cable consisting of: 3 coaxial cond.,
18 stranded, tinned copper cond., and
group
of 4 tinned copper
conductors.
cond. #20 A.W.G.
tinned cadmium bronze,
stranded for low imped
3
MI-13334
0.83"
coax conductors of 72
ohms impedance and 4
cond. of #16 A.W.G. with
insulation for 600 v d -c.
4
Impedance 52 ±2 ohms.
Normal capacitance 30.5
MMF /ft.; max. operating
voltage 4000 RMS.
MI-13340
-
MICROPHONE CABLE
2- conductor,
flexible,
shielded, color coded.
CABLE -Type
RG -58C / U,
vim,: covered.
MI-13341
Impedance,
75
ohms.
Normal capacitance 20.5
MMF /ft., max. operating
voltage 4000 RMS.
Coax cond., impedance
50 ohms ±2 ohms, 18
cond. of #22 A.W.G.
and 4 of #14 A.W.G.
with insulation for 1000
RMS
3 -V
CABLE
FILM
CAMERA
33- conductor,
-
MI- 13380 -2
DELAY CABLE -- -Type RG-
MI-13380-3
COAXIAL CABLE, flexible, double shielded,
rubber cover.
0.625"
0.285"
conductors, each of 41
strand
tinned
copper
wire .0063" dia. to meet
RMS specifications.
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
POWER CABLE
16
-
2 -con-
-
Same
-
Same
MI-13380-6
Impedance 50 ohms. Insulation for 1900 v, RMS.
0.590"
16
2
cond.
cond.
POWER CABLE
as
Same-
-
Same
-
Same
0.593"
16 cond. #16 A.W.G.,
600 v, RMS max.
0.420"
2
0.450"
Some as
POWER CABLE
-
Same
above except
conductors.
cond. #14 A.W.G.,
600 v, RMS max.
3
0.480"
0.540"
as
above except
cond.
Same
5
above except
cond.
Same
4
as
above except
cond.
0.610"
Same as above
6 cond.
0.610"
3
0.625"
12 cond. #18 A.W.G.;
600 v, RMS max.
above except 8 cond.
as
#22 A.W.G.,
#16 A.W.G.
cond. #16 A.W.G.,
twisted
and
shielded
overall as a group, 3
pairs #22 A.W.G. each
pair shielded, 15 cond.
#22 A.W.G.
5
above except 6 cond.
POWER CABLE
as
-
RMS max.
0.625"
above except 5 cond.
2
0.20"
cond., 3 pairs #22
A.W.G.
twisted
and
shielded,
single #22
A.W.G., shielded,
pair
#22 A.W.G., twisted, 18
cond., #22 A.W.G., 600
27
1
black
-
CABLE
POWER CABLE
as
6
1
POWER CABLE, 26-con-
POWER
#16 A.W.G.,
cond. #20 A.W.G., 14
cond. #22 A.W.G., 600
volts RMS.
as above except 3 cond.
12
except
cond. #14 A.W.G.; 5
cond. #18 A.W.G.; 600
v, RMS max.
with insulation for 2500
v, RMS, 60 cycles.
0.75"
MI-13394-N
COLOR
BLE
#22 A.W.G.,
wire jacketed; 4 cond.
#22 A.W.G., wire jack27 cond.
eted; and
2
wires,
block
CAMERA
82
CA.
-neopreneconductors,
jacket.
#22
1.24"
22 A.W.G.;
cond.
cond. #16 A.W.G.; 4
cond. #14 A.W.G., 8
coaxial cables, Type RG58C/U, 50 ohms impedance.
67
3
A.W.G., same shielded.
0.75"
Impedance 1000 ohms.
0.305"
Impedance 74.99 ohms
at 4 mc, normal capacitance 20 MMF /ft., max.
voltage 4000 RMS.
M I -40422-A
Crimping Tool (for use
with MI-13325 Cable
and MI-40423 fittings)
Crimps adaptor to PL259 connector and sleeve
to shield.
MI-40423
Fittings for adapting
MI -13325 Cable to PI
Consisting of 25 pieces
each of inner and outer
sleeving.
65/U, flexihie, shielded.
MI-13325
4 cond.
ductor, flexible, shielded, black vinyl jacket,
non -contaminating.
MI-13380-5
flexible, rubber -covered,
shielded and individually color coded.
MI-13321
0.525"
cond., shielded, stranded wire, black neoprene
jacket.
MI-13380-4
max.
7
as above except 4 cond.
ductor, rubber -covered,
flexible, shielded and individually color coded.
MI-13320
-
POWER CABLE
27
cond., shielded, stranded wire, black neoprene
Impedance,
75
ohms.
Normal capacitance 20.5
MMF /ft. max., operating
voltage 2300 RMS.
v,
flexible.
POWER CABLE- 18 -con-
POWER CABLE, 24 -con-
cond. #20 A.W.G.,
600 v, RMS mox.
0.360"
black
ductor, shielded,
vinyl jacket.
MI-13380-12
MI-13319
7-con-
v,
MI-13380-8
MI-13318-A COAXIAL
CABLE,
jacket.
1
MI-13307-A
POWER
Characteristics
Diam.
ductor, stranded wire,
black vinyl jacket.
MI-13351
flexible,
Approx.
Type Cable
ductor, shielded,
rubber jacket.
istics
once circuits.
rubber covered, flexible,
individual color coding.
MI-74B
Ch
Diam.
MICROPHONE CABLE
3 -conductor, rubber covered, with outer neoprene covering, flexible.
PULSE CABLE
MI-13333
Approx.
Type Cable
Ordering
Information
259 Connector.
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Television Lighting Equipment
FEATURES
Complete lighting facilities from lamps to
lugs -for monochrome and color TV
Efficient, economical studio lighting for any
type of TV studio
Experienced lighting engineers available to
help plan studio requirements
Lighting equipment designed with maximum "flexibility" in mind
Recommendations based on many
successful stations in operation
All lighting fixtures designed for maximum
reliability and safety
85
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Closeup of lighting used in
DESCRIPTION
RCA's complete line of Television Lighting Equipment offers
maximum flexibility, efficiency and economy in meeting
the programming needs of modern, up -to -date TV studios.
Based on their wide experience with the great number of
today's television stations, RCA engineers have carefully
selected a representative line of equipment of leading
lighting manufacturers such as Kliegl Bros. and Century
Lighting Inc. Such equipment includes all the fixtures, accessories and wiring and control devices needed for a
workable and versatile studio lighting system.
During the planning of the television camera and control
equipment for your TV studio, RCA engineers are also
available to help plan your lighting system- whether it be
for a "workshop- type" of studio, TV theatre studio, or a
"repetitive programming" studio. RCA will plan your lighting in accordance with your studio's architectural properties, degree of flexibility desired, and as general program
material dictates.
a
typical TV sat.
"Present-Day" TV Lighting
With the greater trend to color telecasts, proper studio
lighting is occupying the attention of station designers.
Rule -of -thumb lighting requirements have been drastically
revised, and with the introduction of new close- spaced
image orthicon tubes the philosophy of lighting has
changed. Excellent pictures for monochrome or color require evenly lighted scenes. In order to secure such picture quality, light should overlap to cover scene areas
with an even distribution of light.
general, a typical flat lighting requirement for monochrome can be taken at about 100 foot candles. Flat
lighting for color requirement is approximately twice that
required for monochrome and will range from 150 foot
candles for use with highly sensitive I.O. tubes to 300 to
400 foot candles with less sensitive I.O. tubes. These lighting ranges will generally require a lens opening of approximately f 8.0.
In
The additional lighting requirement for color can be satisfied by any one or by a combination of methods -by
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
raising the wattage of existing fixtures, by the addition
of more fixtures of the same type and wattage (especially
desirable in low- ceiling studios of 12 to 14 feet), or by
adding higher wattage fixtures. Another approach may
utilize the use of the new improved high sensitivity image
orthicon tubes which greatly reduces the color lighting
requirements. Forty watts per square foot is generally
suggested for 200 foot candles of lighting.
for greater
of special or "trick" lighting effects. In black- and -white
telecasting dimmer lighting fixtures are used chiefly for
adjusting the contrast between front, back and side lighting and also for effects lighting to create silhouettes, transitions, and so forth. They can be equally useful in color
telecasting, but in color, subject lighting is rarely dimmed
except for unusual dramatic effect. However, dimmers can
be used on background and base lights to show changes
in the time of day, complement the action or mood, change
background color, cut down scenery requirements, and to
make smooth transitions from one scene to another.
The more sensitive I.O. tubes have accounted
use
View of
In the studio,
lighting fixtures are mounted from a fixed
cross -hatched gridwork, or if the ceiling height permits,
on counterbalanced pipe battens or rope, chain, and wire
cable suspended battens. Together with the pantographs,
complete versatility is obtained with a minimum of labor
and delay in rehearsal time. Any size of scenery may,
therefore, be accommodated, and the front fill lights may
be adjusted easily to approximately the recommended
camera level.
More complex switching and dimming will require control
boards. Outlet load selection by means of patch plugs or
rotary selector switchers greatly improve the safety and
efficiency of lighting control. Electronic dimming has now
taken its place in the lighting field to simplify the control
functions. because they control large studio currents with
small control voltages, the electronic console may be located in the studio control room near the video operator.
Check List
In
planning a TV lighting system, a great many factors
must be kept in mind by the TV station engineer and the
an auto- transformer dimmer control console and load selec +or panels
which combine to provide efficient and precise control of lighting for a large studio.
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
TV systems engineer as well. Listed here as a convenient
c.
d. The number and type of fixtures should be adequate
To provide a safe and rapid means of energizing the
to prevent the use of lamps of higher wattage than
the units are designed for.
e. Equipment should include a variety of accessories
specifically made for the fixtures. These are barn
designer.
1.
lighting fixtures:
a. By minimum lengths and number of time consuming
portable cables.
b. By initially installing ample carrying capacity of wiring, control devices and feeders, additional costly
electrical construction in an operating studio can be
eliminated.
doors, diffuser frames, etc. This is to prevent the use
of improvised 'wired on' gadgets that may drop off
or cause damage.
f. Provide maximum light output per dollar invested.
Studio Lighting Techniques
a. To assure dependable operation.
Every television lighting system should be capable of providing the following functions. RCA has selected and makes
available its line of Lighting Equipment to satisfy the
b. To keep maintenance and time consuming improvisa-
various requirements set forth here:
2. To specify
equipment that
is
reliable and can be easily
installed.
tions to a minimum.
obtain the most favorable casualty, compensation, and fire insurance rates.
Base or General Lighting.
Modeling Lighting.
3. Back Lighting.
4. Effects Lighting.
1.
c. To
2.
that are:
yet durable to withweight
handling,
Light
for
easy
a.
handling.
stand the
b. Easily adjusted, repositioned, and focused.
Base lighting is that uniform, wide angle illuminatio:
which covers the whole scene to be televised and is defined
as uniform, diffuse illumination, approaching a shadowless
3. Fixtures should be specified
In this studio scene overhead spots and floods are
8
Safely constructed and wired.
objectives of the TV studio
check list are some of the
manipulated to provide desired lighting effect.
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
condition, sufficient for a television picture of technical
acceptability, and which may be supplemented by other
lighting. The minimum level is limited to a value which
will produce an acceptable signal -to -noise ratio with the
studio camera used. The actual value of incident light required is also determined by the depth of field and normally ranges from 6 to 120 foot -candles for average lens
stops for monochrome and 100 to 400 foot -candles for
color. Productions may require even greater variations
than this, and for our plans, we will specify 80 foot candles for an average interior for monochrome and 240
foot -candles for color. This base or general light can be
provided by incandescent floods (scoops), or long range
scoops (for long distance throws). Base lighting can also be
obtained by using the Fresnel spot lights at flood position.
T.
YtTT TTTTTTTTTT
Modeling light
is directional light at an angle to the camera axis which develops forms in the scene. Shadows are
then produced, and give an illusion of depth to the subject.
This can be obtained by unbalanced base light without
destroying the illusion of the space effect. More generally,
however, Fresnel lens spotlights provided with diffusers and
barn doors can effectively create the form and enhance
the appearance of the scene. The intensity of this lighting
should be 20 to 30 percent greater than the base light
in the scene.
Back lighting. The purpose of back lighting is to separate
the actors from the background. This is obtained by using
spotlights at the rear of the set, directed from above. The
level of this backlight should approach an intensity 50%
greater than that of the base light, and should be applied
with caution since light should never enter the television
camera lens.
Effects lighting is specialized lighting which injects reality
to the televised scene. Such effects as clouds, snow, rain,
lightning, firelight, can be obtained by rear projection or
by simple silhouettes in front of a light source. Many types
of lighting equipment are available for special beam patterns which project light or shadows through windows, open
doors or fireplaces. The background projector has been
used more recently. It can project a simulated background
which may be stationary as produced from a slide or moving objects from motion picture film. For proper picture
quality, the highlights thus projected should be equal to
or at least half of those of the live scene highlights.
Custom combination auto -transformer
all the lighting load circuits terminate
control female receptacles in the patch
grouping of lighting loads is achieved
board and patch panel where
in "Saf-T-Plugs." The dimmers
section. Fast easy selection and
in this low-cost assembly.
from overhead. The means of supporting the lighting fixtures is facilitated by the application tools -viz., grid -work
and pantographs.
The ceiling height of 14 to 18 feet prompts the use of a
primary- secondary type of grid structure using a 11/4-inch
black iron pipe. The primary grid is installed as close to
the ceiling as possible-allowing clearance for raceways,
ducts, and sprinklers. From this permanent group of parallel pipes is suspended a secondary grid. The secondary
pipes are suspended by means of double "C" clamps or
chain from the primary pipes and are perpendicular to
them. The criss-cross network formed should be on 6- to
8 -foot centers to insure adequate facilities for suspension
of fixtures. The secondary pipes allow flexibility, as they
make it convenient to reposition a fixture at any point on
the scene required. Normally, the resulting grid is spaced
12 to 14 feet from the studio floor. From this grid the
fixtures can be hung directly, or through pantograph
hangers.
picture and impart the desired artistic results. Complete
flexibility in all phases of the lighting system is necessary
to satisfy the techniques of present day television.
Pantographs permit raising and lowering of lighting fixtures and when used with crossarms can support a number
of fixtures. Current pantographs can support weights up
to 60 pounds and allow for a vertical travel from 81/2 to
12Y2 feet at maximum extensions. A number of pantographs supported from the grid have a great advantage
for rapid vertical adjustment. Their most important use in
the studio is the support of base lights which, for best
pictures, should be approximately 8 feet from the floor.
Lighting Application Tools
For studios of ceiling heights above 16 feet a counter-
Unobstructed flexibility of camera and mike boom is required on the studio floor; therefore: the lighting is done
weighted type of grid -work is recommended. This type of
grid is described in Plan #3.
The proper combination of these various functions of light
can give the illusion of three dimensions to the television
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
c
tor Strip
ly
16" ellipsoidal
flood
4'/2" pattern
spotlight with
pattern holder
42 ", 6 -light
fluorescent bank
Sketch showing several of the lighting units employed
in
8'
Fresnel spot
4-barn door
attachment
a
typical TV installation.
14" ellipsoidal
flood with
diffusion screen
holder
Wiring and Control Devices
Mounted to the secondary pipes are the connector strips,
each with 5 outlets. These outlets are pigtails of 3- or 4 -foot
cables with female stage connectors attached. A total of
one ceiling outlet for every 20 square feet of working
studio space should be provided in the studio.
From each connector strip, a 12- conductor cable brings
the branch circuits directly, or through 4 by 4 -inch duct
to the studio lighting control. The control board is located
on the studio floor so that the operator can view the
scene or the control room for cues, and has sufficient
switches and dimmers for the accurate and noiseless control of each outlet.
The switchboard should contain a master switch to make
possible blackouts and control of everything but work
lights. The power is fed to individually fused and switch -
able outgoing 20 amp. circuits -one for each ceiling outlet. With the addition of a dimmer board, even greater
flexibility is obtained. Dimming makes possible special
effects, transitions, and control of overall light level.
Practical considerations have limited the studio lighting
to a -c operation. The total a -c power service
recommended for the switchboard input is 30 to 40 watts
per square foot of working studio space from a 3- phase,
4 -wire, 60 -cycle system. In addition to this, a special floor
outlet box is recommended. This outlet in the middle of
the scenic studio area should have a 60 -amp. female
outlet and 3 -pole switch to provide power for special
high current equipment such as an electric range in the
kitchen set.
system
addition,
make
posuniformity
to
and
connectors
of
suitable
outlets
inor
cable,
outlets,
sible complete interchangeability of
the
throughout
strument. An equipment ground, carried
system, insures the safety of all personnel.
The wiring system of this studio should have, in
Lighting Sources
The scoop is a practical source to be considered
for
use
in the TV studio. Several of these units on each scene can
provide easily the desired wide angle base light. This
light level will vary with the mood of the scene to be televised. When mounted on the pantograph hanger, they
can be adjusted with the result that their beam strikes the
scene at an angle no greater than 20 degrees and, with
diffuser frames, give the proper breakup of the harsh light.
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
A number of Fresnel spotlights can provide the key and
THE
modeling light for the scenes. These units, together with
suitable
barn doors, can provide the
proper, narrow -
OR
PANTO-
height adjustment of these lighting fixtures. Light -Lifts are available for 12 -15 pounds, 18 -22
pounds, 26 -30 pounds, 0 -24
pounds, and 0 -60 pound loads
in either 7 -foot or 12 -foot ex-
angled light to supply form for the scene. Their level should
contribute a 20 to 30 percent increase in intensity above
the average base lighting.
These spotlights can provide backlight of 50 percent greater
intensity than the base light. The purpose of backlight
LIGHT -LIFT
GRAPH: Negator springs permit
automatic counter balance and
tensions.
They
are
used
to
quickly change the height or
angle of a lamp, soften shadow
when used with a fill -light
scoop, or correct a shadow
angle when used with a key -
is
to separate the main actors from the background scenery.
light fresnel.
THE
SCOOP: These
18 -inch
di-
ameter, 750 to 2,000 watt wide
angle, versatile floodlights provide
efficient,
soft,
diffuse
beam. Use with base and fill
lights.
Included
are
yoke,
C-
clamp and pin- connector.
Also
available are diffusers, cinemoid
holder and pantographs
a controlled beam
ellipsoidal reflector and stepped
or plano convex lens system. Available are 6- inch -750 watt, 8-inch750 watt, 8-inch -2,000 watt, 8- inch -3,000 watt, 12- inch -5,000 watt
units. They provide a clearly defined hard-edge beam. Gobos produce
varied patterns on backgrounds. They can also be used with slash
lights. The projectors include, yoke, C -clamp and pin -connector. Also
THE PATTERN PROJECTOR:
hard
SPOT: This soft
efficient spotlight is the
single most valuable lighting instrument for TV usage. Spots
rated 3- inch -1S0 watt, 6-inch750 watt, 8 -inch -2,000 watt,
12- inch -2,000 watt, 16 -inch5,000 watt, or 20- inch -10,000
watt provide variable beam
spread in a smooth even field.
Use with high and low key
THE
FRESNEL
edge
lighting, controlled fill lighting,
or specials. Each spot includes,
yoke, C- clamp, pin -connector.
Also available are barn doors,
"pole-op," rectangular beam
"lite
lenses, "cookies," and
lifts."
This specialized unit is
edge spotlight employing an
available are patterns, variable lenses and iris.
THE
LIGHT:
STRIP
A series of
lamps are set in designed re-
flectors in an approved wire way for efficient easy handling.
Lamps, 6, 8 or 12 inches on
center can be specified. These
are
used
for background light-
ing, eye lighting, etc. Included
leads
are reflectors, trunions,
connectors. Color filters,
roundels, cinemoid and clamps
are useful accessories.
and
THE REAR SCREEN
PROJECTOR:
The rear screen projector has
FOLLOW SPOTS: This is
a
useful specialized instrument available from
a finely controlled beam of
750 watts up to 5,000 watts. They provide
a hard -edge, and are recommended for use with follow
accent on star performer and special effect lights. They are
provided with stand, yoke, iris, pin- connector and color booms, spread
light with
spot,
lenses and color wheels are available.
a
ratio
and units of 2,000 watt, 2,100
watt 60 volt, 3,000 and 5,000 watt are available. They can be used
as front or rear screen projectors. Each unit includes a stand and
standard lens. Accessories available are automatic slide changers and
super wide angle lens system.
one -to -one
beam
spread
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
jilliall
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED CHAIN SUSPENDED (RACKS
W
11H
INDIVIDUAL FIXTURE RAISING AND LOWERING DEVICES
I
(
,,ALTERNATE
BATTENS)
PANTOGRAPHS
METHODS
1
:
--
COUNTI
STELL CAti1
CEILING
TE.RlMNALMI
CHAIN -+
MIILTICONOUC TOIL
CAS
KE
CONNECTOR STRIP
WITH PIGTAIL OUTLETS
°
G'TRESNE
-
PATTERN PROI ECTOR,
=/
=rJ`r,l
L_.11_ 1._p 7.\\1
o+i!------==-._.,.__
['1,íJ1
--..-
WANE'
.-`
y
T-
--I----..
------t-..
.i
Taxi
11
' YLiI
r
I.:I
4x4 WIRE-WAY
n
NON -DIN BOARD
FEEDER BAITS
CYCLORAMA STRIPLIGH7
PATCH
BOARD.
DIMMER BOARD.
92
.
1
I1II.
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
_IGNTED TRACKS
LL W DTH OF
I
(BATTENS
CEILING TERMINAL BOY.
)
s-runlo
Three Practical Equipment Plans
Obviously, each TV studio must be considered on the basis
of its own size and the programming to be accomplished.
However, included here are floor plans and equipment lists
for three station plans. These plans will perhaps cover
a majority of the applications met in actual practice.
#1
Plan
Portable Lighting Equipment Complement for a Semi Permanent Studio (18' x 25', Two Scene)
plan, the studio will undoubtedly be used for
repetitive type of programming. Local, unrehearsed shows
such as panel discussions, interviews, local spots, kitchen
shows or demonstrations will be predominant. Although the
studio is a small 18 by 25 -foot unit, it can accommodate
a permanent kitchen set and an office scene. Space is
also available for displaying the sponsor's products and
In this
il
1
i
Ti
a vue
I
r
WILT I CONDUCTOR
FLEXIBLE CABLE
advertising placards.
CONNECTOR STRIP
ri WITH
The lighting system for such a studio has previously been
I
OTLETSAII
I
I
I
described from the standpoint of application tools, wiring
and control devices, and sources. The equipment required
for TV Studio Plan #1 is listed below.
I
II
4x4
WREWAV 1A
Sketch showing studio scenic arrangement for Plan
#1.
CONTROL
BOARD
KITCHEN
SET
COUNTER-WEIGHT
STUDIO
CAMERA
CARRIAGE
TUT BOX
,LOOD LIGHT
.,¡
I
3ID'>, so' STUDIO
(EICHT TO GRID APPROX 14'
\
rr
IIII
OFFICE
SCENE
CAMERA CABLE
OUT L
E
Tom_
ADVERTISING
PL AC A RD
PA5ZTVP /SCR COMPOSITE
SAF.PATCHA SCR DIMMER. BOARD
i
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR PLAN =1
Stock Reference
Qty.
Description
Century
with
3 -pole connectors)
FIXTURES leach
Klieg/
3 -wire,
4
Baby Scoop, 300-500 w.
1312GP
1122TVG
4
Scoop, 750 -2000 w.
1318GP
1155TVG
2
3 -Inch
Fresnel Spotlight, 75 -150 w.
523GP
4
6 -Inch
Fresnel Spotlight, 250 -750 w.
520GP
4
8 -Inch
Fresnel Spotlight, 1000 -2000 w. 570GP
44N3TVG
44N6TVG
44N8TVG
1
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 250 -750 w.
1598GP
Pattern Projector, 250 -750 w.
1591TGP
1365TVG
Iris
1365PTVG
Diffuser Frame, Baby Scoop
Diffuser Frame, Scoop
4410
1078C
4418R
1078X
Roll of Spun Glass Diffuser
1
Safety and flexibility in the studio wiring system is assured by the use of six connector strips. Each has five
pigtail female outlets and is fed from a terminal box on
a 4 -inch duct through rubber cable. Spaced uniformly on
the secondary pipes, they provide 30 ceiling outlets or
approximately one outlet for every 30 square feet of studio
space. Five other double outlet circuits are provided
to
2 feet from the floor on the walls. The adequate branch
circuits available at the switchboard make it possible to
always find a convenient outlet in the studio. A uniform
type of connector throughout the lighting system is suggested to permit interchangeability.
1
ACCESSORIES
4
4
1
1
2
SGD
S-85
4 -Way Barn
Door for 3 -Inch Fresnel
2579
2 -Way Barn
Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2570
10803A
1080
2580
1080A
2571
1081
2085 2071
1097TV
4-Way Born Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2 -Way Barn Door for 8 -Inch Fresnel
Set of Patterns for Pattern Projector
Roller Caster Floor Stands
Lightweight Pantograph Hangers
1
2
1
3
5
Short Extension Cables
Medium Extension Cables
5
3
111TV
10RC 20PG
10E955G
20PG
25E955G
Stock Reference
6308/
5-20PG/25'
boxes
6308/
5-200P/35'
boxes
Portable Switch, Dimmer, and Distribution Panel with a minimum of 18-20 DPKC6.6000
amp outlets
P522 FS
1
Plan
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR PLAN =2
Qty.
Portable Connector Strip, with 35 ft.
Cable and 5 outlets and load end
2
1421
3280
25RC
WIRING AND CONTROL DEVICES
(3 -Wire System)
Portable Connector Strip, with 25 ft.
Cable a: d 5 outlets and load end
2
TV3214
All ceiling and floor outlets are wired to the switchboard
where they are switchable or dimmable either collectively
or individually, by a patchboard where each outlet is provided with a counterbalanced, retractable cord and male
plug. They are patched into the desired bank of grouped
female jacks, and, in turn, can be energized by breaker
switches. The patching feature makes it possible to group
all the fixtures associated with a particular scene to one
2440TVG/
FIXTURES
25
2440TVG/
35
2417TVG
=2
6
6
3
The studio of Plan
x
34'
x
14' Ceiling)
might be classified as a general
utility or "workshop" type of studio. Unlike the Plan #1
studio, it is capable of handling somewhat more complex
programming involving more frequent setup changes. Dramatic, planried, or restricted sequence progrcms will originate from this (22 by 34 by 14 to 18 -foot high) studio.
To
2
fulfill the requirements of present and future program-
ming, the lighting arrangement for this studio must be as
flexible as possible. A criss -cross pipe grid on 6 -foot
centers and spaced 12 to 14 feet from the floor is used.
With such a network and spacing, it is always easy to
relocate a fixture on a desired point in a scene. Besides
the fixtures themselves, the grid also supports the connector strips and pantograph hangers. Since the latter
brings the fixtures within arm's reach, they facilitate the
adjustment of fixtures with a minimum amount of time
and effort on the part of electricians or other production
personnel.
(each with
6 -Inch
5
8 -Inch
Century
Klieg/
1312GP
1318GP
523GP
1122TVG
1155TVG
3 -wire,
3 -pole connectors)
Baby Scoop, 300 -500 w.
Scoop, 750 -2000 w.
3 -Inch Fresnel Spotlight, 75 -150 w.
12
Fresnel Spotlight, 250 -750 w.
44N3TVG
44N6TVG
44N8TVG
520GP
2
Fresnel Spotlight, 1000 -2000 w.
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 250 -750 w.
570GP
1598GP
2
Pattern Projector, 250-750 w
1591TGP
TV Lighting Equipment Complement for a Permanent
Studio (approx. 22'
Description
1365TVG
Iris
1365PTVG
ACCESSORIES
6
6
1
1
4
2
2
2
5
8
2
10
6
Diffuser Frame, Baby Scoop
Diffuser Frame, Scoop
Roll of Spun Glass Diffuser
4 -Way Barn Door for 3 -Inch Fresnel
2 -Way Barn Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
4 -Way Barn Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2 -Way Barn Door for 8 -Inch Fresnel
Set of Patterns for Pattern Projector
Roller Caster Floor Stands
Lightweight Pantograph Hangers
Heavyweight Pantograph Hangers
Short Extension Cables
Medium Extension Cables
4410
4418R
1078C
1078X
S-85
SGD
2579
2570
2580
10803A
1080
1080A
2571
1081
2085 2071
TV3214
3280
3283
IORC 20PG
1097TV
25RC'20PG
25E955G
6308
2432G 20
1421
111TV
112TV
10E955G
WIRING CONTROL DEVICES
(3 -Wire System)
6
2
1
Connector Strips, with
20 ft. cables
Wall Outlet,
Wall Outlet,
2
1
5
outlets and
5 -20PG
way, 20 amp.
-way 60 amp.,
3
3018
phase
20'
2 -20PG
3049
2433G/2
2405TVG/
60
1
Switch,
Dimmer, and Load Selection
Control Board with a minimum of
30 -20 amp. outlets
DPKC6 -6000
2409TVG/
PS22 FS
2416TVG
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
master and dimmer. Lastly, the studio light control must be
(Alternate)
Plan
capable of supplying 25 KW of fused power or almost 30
TV Lighting Equipment Complement for a Permanent
Studio (approx. 30' x 50' x 27' Ceiling)
watts per square foot of studio floor space.
From an engineering standpoint, the lighting sources must
provide the proper quality and quantity of light needed to
produce a good TV picture. Practically, it has been found
that incandescents or a combination of fluorescents and
incandescents can provide the quality of light to insure
proper tonal rendition for monochrome cameras. Fluorescents cannot be mixed with incandescents for color cam-
The television studio of "Plan
Plan
#2 Alternate"
is
similar to
#2, except that this plan can accommodate two
more scenes. In using a higher ceiling in a larger studio,
counterweighted batten
a
sketch at left. "Plan
is
employed as shown in the
#2 Alternate" studio
is
30 by 50 feet
and can also be classified as a workshop type of studio.
Lighting equipment
eras because of their wide difference in effective color
is
listed below.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR ALTERNATE PLAN
#2
temperature. The quantity of light reflected from the TV
scene must be sufficient to allow the camera to produce
a picture
of acceptable signal -to -noise ratio. The average
lighting level
is
is
Stock Reference
Qty.
FIXTURE
Scoop, 750 -2000 w.
1318GP
1155TVG
523GP
44V 3TVG
44N6TVG
44N8TVG
that there be proper flexibility in control and lens stops
16
LAYOUT
IS
uPKN wMr PLAN ICING CP4NG
AND LONEN PAU SCENIC
STYYETPIcL
ANNGELCNT
SO
-\
App
1122TVG
1312GP
10
4
NOTE
Kliegl
(each with 3 -wire,
3 -pole connectors)
Baby Scoop, 300-500 w.
produce about 400 foot -candles of incident light in order
for future color productions.
Century
10
100 foot -candles for monochrome, but it
recommended that sufficient sources be available to
Description
3 -Inch
Fresnel Spotlight, 75 -150 w.
6 -Inch Fresnel Spotlight, 250.750 w.
520GP
Fresnel Spotlight, 1000 -2000 w. 570GP
8
8 -Inch
2
Fresnel Senior Spotlight, 2000 w.
572GP
44N12TVG
2
Striplight
QS84
4-500PG
606TVG'
3
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 250-750 w. 1598GP
13S5TVG
Iris
3
Pattern Projector, 250 -750 w.
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 1000 w.
1
1
8
1591TGP
1365PTVG
1522GP
1336TVG
Iris
nooN ou*LCr
ACCESSORIES
MALE
\12
CLMP
ON
.C-
Diffuser Frame, Baby Scoop
4410
1078C
10
Diffuser Frame, Scoop
4418R
1078X
SGD
S-85
2
4 -Way Barn Door
3 -Inch Fresnel
2579
10803A
6
2 -Way Barn Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2570
1080
2
4 -Way Barn Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2580
1080A
4
2 -Way Barn Door for 8 -Inch Fresnel
2571
1081
Barn Door for Senior Fresnel
2573
1082
2085-2071
1097TV
ENAIw
wTLt ctalNG
oNKCT00 STA.
(
10
T
Roll of Spun Glass Diffuser
1
Two
30
MOP
'LOON OUTLETS
2 -Way
1
for
for Pattern Projector
2
Set of Patterns
6
Roller Caster Floor Stands
TV3214
1421
8
Lightweight Pantograph Hanger
3280
111TV
4
Heavyweight Pantograph Hanger
3283
112TV
Short Extension Cable
10RCi20PG
10E955G
Medium Extension Cable
25RC'20PG
25E955G
WIRING AND CONTROL DEVICES
12 -ft. Connector strip with 5 outlets
& 20 -ft. of Cable
6312
2431G/20
16
6
14
4
Wall Outlet,
2 -way, 20
1
Wall Outlet,
1
1
amp.
-way, 60 amp., 3 phase
Switch, Dimmer, and Load Selection
Control Board with a minimum of
kw dims,
70 -20 amp. outlets, 6
-200 amp.
6 -6 kv. non -dims,
main switch
5-20 PG '20'
3018; 2-20PG
2433G
3049
2405TVG
60
2
-6
1
Sketch showing the studio lighting arrangement for Plan
#2.
561122CR
PA32TVP'
74
LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
#3
Plan
#3
Sketch of Plan
TV Lighting Equipment Complement for a Permanent
Studio (approx. 40' x 60' x 27' Ceiling)
The studio of Plan
\
a e(o,_.
b
aJ
#3 offers greater versatility than that
studio (40 x 60) showing lighting arrangement
oxo
o
\a~
!
b
of the previous plans described. It will originate a variety
of dramatic shows and commercial sequences. Having a
b
0
,0
OUTLET CEILING
STRIP
CONNECTOR
.
--11
b
40 by 60 foot working space, it requires approximately 100
\
T1ME[
branch circuits. Branch circuits may be grouped as scenery
-.
I_
30
rLOOR ou
T-
requires by means of a patch or rotary selector board.
'COUNTLAwEIGN,CO
SATTER
They, in turn, are switched and dimmed at the control
board.
TOTAL
22
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR PLAN
A.'
OUTLETS
TRO 30
ILOOR OUTLETS
IOU CEILING
s TOR AGE
#3
ILOOR
-4
F--
1-
Stock Reference
Qty.
Description
Century
Klieg!
FIXTURES (each with 3 -way,
3 -pole connectors)
TLEUIRLE GUILE TO
TERMINAL BOO
15
Baby Scoop, 300-500 w.
1312GP
1122TVG
15
Scoop, 750 -2000 w.
1318GP
1155TVG
523GP
44N3TVG
4
3 -Inch Fresnel
Spotlight, 75-150 w.
20
6 -Inch Fresnel Spotlight, 250 -750 w.
15
8 -Inch
Fresnel Spotlight,
3
12 -Inch Fresnel Senior
4
Striplight
520GP
44N6TVG
1000 -1500 w. 570GP
44N8TVG
Spotlight, 2000 w. 572GP
SELECTOR
QS84/
606TVG/
4 -500PG
8
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 250-750 w. 1598GP
1365TVG'
4
Pattern Projector, 250-750 w.
1591TGP
Iris
1365PTVG
2
Follow Spotlight with Iris, 1000 w.
1522GP
1366TVG
Iris
ACCESSORIES
15
Diffuser Frame, Baby Scoop
4410
1078C
15
Diffuser Frame, Scoop
Roll of Spun Glass Diffuser
4418R
1078X
SGD
S -85
for
3 -Inch Fresnel
2579
10803A
Door for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2570
1080
2
4-Way Barn Door
8
2-Way Barn
3
4-Way Barn Door
8
2-Way Barn
1
2 -Way Barn Door
-
LICNTIMG CONTROL
BOARD
8
12
for 6 -Inch Fresnel
2580
1080A
Door for 8 -Inch Fresnel
2571
1081
for Senior Fresnel
2573
1082
Set of Patterns for Pattern Projector
2085/2071
1097TV
Roller Caster Floor Stands
TV3214
1421
Lightweight Pantograph Hanger
3280
111TV
Heavyweight Pantograph Hanger
3283
112TV
20
Short Extension Cable
IORC /20PG
10E955G
10
Medium Extension Cable
25RC / 20PG
25E955G
20
WIRING AND CONTROL DEVICES
15 ft. Connector Strip with 5 outlets
6315 /
5.20PG
3018 /2.20PG
619G/15
3049
2405TVG;'
6
5
Wall Outlet,
2 -way
2
Wall Outlet,
1
-way, 50 amp., 3 phase
5
2433G!2
60
1
Switch, Dimmer, and Load Selection
Control Board with a minimum of
100-20 amp. Circuits, 12-6000 w.
dimmers and 1 -200 amp. main
switch
S61126CCR
1
114
PIn
PA33TVP
12/110
R[IGNTS
--
---.I
_xROOM
CONTROL
01000
Summary of Lighting Plans
Size
Type
Camera
Temporary
1
Camera
Permanent
2 Camera
Permanent
3 Camera
Permanent
Area
Outlets
Ceiling Floor
Diem.
Ht.
18x25
14
450
20
0
2
22x34
14
750
30
5
4
30x50
27
1500
60
9
6
40x60
27
2400
100
12
8
(sq. ft.)
Scenes
1
MINIMUM
27'
COILING
PERMANENT
GRID
CEILING
I
2
ANO
T---
TO
44N12TVG
3
2
_
I
ROPE ON CABLE
I
SHEAVES
/4" PIPE
DROP
ROPE
OR
CABLE
COUNTERWEIGHTED
BATTENS
PANTOGRAPH
HANGER
12'
SCENE
tA
TV CAMERA
Studio arrangement for proper ceiling height to permit
varying
ry set heights.
MOBILE UNITS
Custom TV Mobile Units
FEATURES
Choice of standard truck, bus or trailer
chassis
-
Custom designed for any requirement
monochrome or color live pickup, tape
production, film and program transmission
Adequate horsepower and load capacity
with maximum roadability
Completely air conditioned with cooling
and heating units
Balanced weight distribution
Bodies carefully engineered for efficient
space utilization, operator c'mfort, and easy
access to equipment
Maximum equipment storage space
Under floor wiring trench system provided
Many optional feature; such as air suspension, camera roof platform, hydraulic lift,
expansible sides, built -in generator
All equipment installed and system tested,
ready for use
MOBILE UNITS
Mobile studios -on- wheels meet varied studio needs. Above station WFBM -TV uses trailer to color telecast the 500 Festival Golf Tourney. At lower
left, Station WMVS -TV has remote truck at the Wisconsin State Fair Park with members of the U.S. Navy Scuba diving team. Lower right, WERE's
custom bus with turret in "recessed" position, is shown right in the center of things as a political parade and rally are staged in Cleveland.
USES
Since the early days of television, mobile units -a station's
studio -on- wheels -have broadened the scope of TV programming, added dynamic impact to sponsor's commercials, and proved an effective public relations medium. It
is impossible to bring all events, sponsors, and environment
to the studio door, but with a complete mobile production
facility it is possible to drive to the scene to be televised.
Whether the TV coverage problem is a sporting event,
emergency news item, parade, convention or remote pickup
of a sponsor product, a mobile unit is ready at all times.
The mobile unit can incorporate multiple camera chains, or
many variations of other equipments including switching,
tape, film and microwave facilities. As such, it can be used
in conjunction with broadcast studio facilities thereby per-
mitting color or monochrome pickup and tape playback
from existing facilities.
In producing commercials these same facilities can be
transported to the sponsor's plant, or anywhere to capture
the product story as it is used. In educational and other
closed circuit applications the mobile unit adds another
dimensions of efficiency -that cf obtaining the highest
degree of equipment utilization.
An attractively styled mobile unit is an excellent promotional asset. The unit can reflect the image that the station
or agency wishes to set in the community. Combined with
the many functional features of interior design and adequate drive power "to get you there" the RCA Television
Mobile Units offer the utmost in flexibility and efficiency.
MOBILE UNITS
DESCRIPTION
RCA Television Mobile Units are custom built vehicles designed to meet specific customer requirements including
road conditions, environment and equipment layout needs.
Since all States impose restrictions in length, height and
weight of a vehicle, it is important to design a mobile
unit to meet the laws of the State where it is to be licensed.
When a unit is to be used interstate then a compromise
may be required in order that the unit can travel freely
cross -country. Road conditions will determine the horsepower, suspension, and other features affecting roadability.
For example, mountain roads require large horsepower
engines and transmissions while bumpy, off- highway driving may require air suspension instead of springs. In addition, the temperature and humidity expected to be encountered will determine the heating and cooling required
inside the unit.
Years of experience by RCA in the design and construction
of color and monochrome television mobile equipment are
reflected in the RCA series of custom trucks, buses, and
trailers. Each is specially engineered to provide the facilities required, whether it be for originating, recording or
playing back of TV programs and commercials. Each unit
is carefully engineered for efficient space utilization, operator comfort, and easy access to equipment. There is ample
operating area for the operating and maintenance personnel. Complete underside storage space is provided in
order that each equipment can be quickly unloaded. Everything to assure smooth production and program versatility,
including central control, is designed into the equipment.
RCA Mobile Units are provided with standard truck, bus
or trailer chassis and custom bodies. Standard brand
chassis assure engine maintenance and spare parts anywhere on the road. Custom bodies offer many advantages
including wider body, no wheel boxes, better visibility, full
size cab, firm door fits, versatile styling, underside storage
compartments and recessed door handles and locks. Fiber-
Mobile Camera Production Unit showing distinctive step in forward roof line, fiberglass
front end, and deluxe trim. Reinforced roof affords vantage point for use of field camera chain.
TJ -70D
MOBILE UNITS
glass front end, special 2 -inch insulation, acoustical perforated steel walls and ceiling, custom interior lighting,
reinforced floors and roof, rear bumper formed into step,
and many other custom extras can also be provided. They
have the design advantage of stronger construction and
longer life.
offers the following mobile equipment groupings:
TJ-70D Truck for TK -60 camera facilities, TJ -72A Truck for
TV Tape Equipment, TJ -81A Bus for TK -14 camera chains,
RCA
and
TJ -91A
Trailer for color camera field operations.
TJ -70 Mobile Truck
The RCA TJ -70D Television Mobile Unit is especially designed for the TV Station which depends heavily on its
remote pickup programs. Incorporating the same conveniences as are found in studio installations, the TJ -70D
Mobile Unit facilitates the origination of either elaborate
cr simple remote programs with minimum set -up time and
provisions for up to four complete monochrome TV camera chains as well as video switching, audio and monitoring equipment.
The TJ -70D mobile unit consists essentially of a standard
11/2 ton type International Harvester chassis on which is
constructed a custom two -level body attractively styled
and well- engineered for practical application of remote
television pickups.
Operating Compartment
The Operating Compartment
is in the forward end of the
vehicle and is made up of two parts: The video operator's
position, and the switching position. Entrance into this sec-
Rear view of TJ -70D showing cable entrance
panels
and four cable reek.
tion is mode through the front doors. An attractive switching console is provided for the audio operator and program director. This switching console is in the front of the
vehicle, facing the rear, and is on an elevated platform.
From this console can conveniently be seen the monitors
and camera control units which are mounted vertically in
an equipment frame in the middle of the vehicle.
The front portion of the switching console is sloping so as
to reduce to a minimum eye movement between picture
Interior view of the TJ -70D showing switching console overlooking
the equipment frame and video
position in the operating compartment.
100
8.3300
MOBILE UNITS
monitors and switching controls. On one side of the switching console, space is provided for a BC -5B Studio Type
Audio Consolette. The BC -5B Audio Consolette is mounted
flush with the top surface of the sloping portion of the
switching console. On the other side of the sloping portion
of the switching console is provision for mounting either
a TS -5A Program Switcher with an adjacent TS -2B Preview
Switcher or if desired a TS -11 Switcher for more elaborate
facilities. A hinged leaf -type extension is provided to
extend the switching console across the entire width of the
vehicle when more prcgramming personnel are used. Thus,
seating is provided for audio operator, the video switching
position, and for program director.
On the sloping portion of the switching console, between
the audio console and video switcher, is a small space
designed to permit the installation of a desk telephone set
connected to Carfone Communications equipment installed
in the maintenance area. This is especially convenient for
cueing. The entire front of the switching console is hinged
to permit accessibility of any of the equipment mounted
underneath, such as intercom power supply.
Flush mounted in a shelf in back of the audio position is
monitoring loudspeaker which is connected to the monitoring loudspeaker output of the BC -5B Audio Console. On
either side of the operating compartment are two large
windows. To prevent direct sunlight from falling on the
face of the monitors, these windows are equipped with
curtains. Two small adjustable spotlights for use in reading scripts are mounted on a swivel above the windows.
These spotlights are so positioned that a minimum of
stray light falls on the face of the picture monitors and
a dimmer control is provided for the spotlight to permit
adjustment of the light to any convenient level. An equip ment frame is provided in the middle of the vehicle which
separates the operating compartment from the maintenance compartment. In this equipment frame are located
the camera control units, master monitor, picture monitors
and sync generators, so arranged as to provide convenient
operation by the video operator and easy visibility to the
switcher position. All units in the equipment rack are
mounted on slides, so that they may be withdrawn into
the maintenance ccmpartment while in operating condition. Maintenance work can then be done on the equipment without disturbing program personnel while the
mobile unit is "on the air."
a
On the lower level of the equipment frame portholes are
located for four camera control units and line master
monitor. These are positioned so that the cornera control
units may be conveniently operated by the video operator
sitting immediately in front of the equipment rack, while
the monitors may be easily seen by the switching personnel
in the forward elevated position. Above the camera control units in the equipment rack are provisions for two
14 -inch picture monitors, one of which may be used for
continuously monitoring program output and the other
may be used as a preview monitor with a TS -2 Switcher.
The preview monitor may be switched to any camera posi-
tion, off- the -air signal, or microwave transmitter monitoring
output. The use of the preview monitor and preview
switcher provides facilities for previewing the next camera
shot such as is desired in well rehearsed shows, or previewing the insertion of a commercial into the program.
On either side of the two picture monitors there is space
for two sync generators.
Facilities for switching to the standby sync generator can
be provided through the location under the equipment
rack of an automatic changeover switch. A clock with large
sweep second hand is installed over the picture monitors
in easy view of the program personnel.
Facilities for three inter -phone connection units are included in the vehicle at the audio operator, video switcher,
and video operator positions. These provide convenient
intercom facilities from the operating personnel to the
cameramen.
A one and a half ton air conditioning system is located
at the forward right side of the cab. To increase the
efficiency of the air conditioning unit rubber gaskets are
installed around the camera control units, monitors, etc.
to isolate the program compartment from the maintenance
compartment since only the operating section is cooled.
A 14 -inch three -speed exhaust fan in the roof over a
standard rack provides ventilation of the power supplies
and other equipments located in the middle portion of
the vehicle.
Rack space is located at the rear for mounting video dis-
tribution amplifiers, power supplies, off- the -air tuner and
other rack equipment.
The camera heads and viewfinders are also stored in the
rear while the vehicle
is in
motion.
Maintenance Compartment
The maintenance compartment is in the rear of the vehicle. A 55 -inch by 33 -inch table contains ample space for
location of test equipment, and is especially convenient for
emergency maintenance in the field. The maintenance
ccmpartment contains a rack to house the camera power
supplies, WP -16B Power Supply and powerstat line corrector unit, or automatic voltage regulator, whichever is preferred. The camera power supplies are mounted on slides
so that they may be conveniently withdrawn from the
rear of the frame. Access to the roof is provided through
a hatch over the table in the maintenance compartment.
The location of the hatch at this point permits personnel
to stand on the table and pass equipments through the
hatch in the roof.
MOBILE UNITS
The microwave transmitter control, as well as the car -phone
VHF intercommunications equipment, can be installed on
The rear bumper is reinforced to accommodate a pintle
hook for attaching a power generating trailer.
the wall over the workbench. A hangup type microphone,
connected in parallel with the VHF desk telephone in the
operating compartment, permits maintenance personnel
to communicate with the studio or transmitter station when
orienting the microwave antenna.
The roof
is reinforced to support the weight of personnel
and operating equipment such as cameras and tripods.
The roof surface is made of steel floor plate. Anchor
loops are welded in the roof along the edges for lashing
down the operating equipment. The parabolic reflector
for the microwave equipment may be clamped to the roof
for transporting. A metal pipe receptacle welded to the
roof plate on the curb side will permit the insertion of a
11/2-inch mast to support the off- the -air monitor receiving
antenna. Storage facilities for this antenna are also provided on the roof.
Rear Storage Compartment
Outside compartments in the rear of the mobile unit are
used to house four large cable storage reels, crank operated for easy operation. Over the cable reel compartment
is a smaller compartment containing a panel on which
are mounted the connectors for all cable connections for
the truck, exclusive of power. On this connector panel are
four camera cable connectors; one connector for microwave transmitter input; antenna connector for off- the -air
monitoring receiver; three video connectors for external
video monitors; two a -c receptacles for a -c external equipments and microphone receptacles for four microphone
inputs; one remote input and one remote cue input. Set -up
time is reduced to a minimum. Since the wiring from this
connector panel is already connected to each of the
associated equipments installed in the truck, all connections can be quickly made in this one compartment.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard
Chassis
Tires
11/2
ton truck with heavy duty springs and shocks
8:25 -20, 10 ply. Dual rear wheels
Outside Dimensions:
Length
Width
Height
23' 9"
7' 111/2"
___
_
_
11'
Inside Dimensions:
Length (back of driver's seat)
16'
_
Width ..7' 6"
Height
6' 8"
Outside Finish
Green and white (added cost for CB finish)
Total Weight (with equipment).
Approx. 15,000 lbs.
Body
Custom built with step in forward top of roof,
roof hatch, curb side door, two windows, and built -in work bench,
production desk, and video control equipment frame, and roof deck
Power Connections
The incoming power connection is made through a hatch
in the skirt of the truck adjacent to the entrance door. A
central circuit breaker panel is provided for the isolation
transformer and power -stat line corrector. An a -c volt
meter is provided on the switching console. Pushbuttons
for remote control of the motor driven transformer are
located in the switching console, adjacent to the voltmeter
so that incoming voltage can be conveniently maintained
constant at all times.
Equipment Supplied
1
Mobile Camera Unit. Includes: -air conditioner, 16,300 BTU
per air output; -Power Stat line Voltage Corrector, 15 KVA;
-Power Isolation Transformer, 15 KVA; -Power Control Panel;
-Power Coble, 100 foot; -set of equipment slides; -A -c Power
cable and conduit installed; 4 -cable reels, manual; 1- Blower for
equipment rack; -fire extinguisher; -light control; 1- channel
master TV receiving antenna;
-A -c Voltage control panel with
voltmeter; 1 -Ten foot aluminum mast for TV antenna; 1- clock;
l -set of wiring, cables and connectors installed; 1- Entrance connection panel for Audio, Visual and Power Cables.
TJ -70D
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Floor plan of TJ -70D showing switcher console behind driver's seat, equipment frame
after the pull out leaf, and table and equipment rack at extreme rear of truck.
AIR INTAKE
FLOOR\
IN
LADDER
ROOF
n
TABLE
-
gi
INSIDE
WIDTH
90"
'
-
'
I
HATCH
--Cr.
I
-
'
'.
W DE
'EQUIPMENT
0
;
COMB. DOME LIGHT
I
'
ADJUST
LIFT -UP
SEAT
SEAT
I
/.--',
i;
%
PULL
OUT
LEAF,
RACK
a
1
I
A
IA
Ì
DROP LEAF
,,
AIR INTAKE
IN FLOOR
,.
STEPWELLWITH
STEELCOVER
F
MOUNT ON WALL
SAME MGT. ASTABLE
13+FLUSH
B
PANEL DOOR
' ,,
HINGE
ITEM 01- 14) -12 VOLT DOME LIGHTS
RAIL -(2) ON EACH SIDE
WITH SWITCH ON EACH LAMP
IN ROOF
6"
HINGE
WN
AT
AIR
CONDITIONER
art
' x1
STEPWELL
J
(2) -110 VOLT CENTURY DRAMA LIGHT 0381
(1 -EACH ROOF
RAIL)
MOBILE UNITS
TJ -72
TJ -72
Television Tape Truck shows exclusive front end design with channel trim.
Television Tape Truck
The RCA Television Tape Mobile Unit is designed to serve
facility including
ample space for operation, maintenance, tape editing and
tape storage. Designed for on- location recording of remote pickup events, the mobile tape unit is supplied completely equipped with either monochrome or color tape
recorder equipment. The mobile unit greatly facilitates
transporting tape facilities for on -spot pickups and can
serve as a permanent tape recording studio.
as a complete mobile television recording
The layout is planned for efficiency of operation and main-
tenance. The roomy interior of the tape mobile unit provides 16 feet of operation room behind the driver. The
body interior measures 7 feet and 4 inches wide by 6 feet
10 inches high. The equipment space is ample for a complete TR -22 Tape Recorder and associated facilities with
space provided for extra color and test items. Racks are
provided to house audio facilities as well as cabinets and
compartments for tape storage and areas for tape editing
facilities, scopes, spare tape headwheel panel assembly,
module extender and splicer. The custom body has a distinctive front design, complete trench system under the
floor, three underside storage compartments, recessed locks
and storage cabinets for accessory items including 3 cable
reels. A -c power for the tape recorder is supplied from a
7.5 KVA isolation transformer. A 6.0 KVA electromechani-
TJ -72
interior
as
Tape Equipment
viewed through rear doors. Note Type TR.22 Television
with air conditioner and storage cabinet at left.
MOBILE UNITS
secure removable equipment such as monitors. Wedges are
press fitted under the blower and compressor shock mounts
of the TR -22 while in transit.
SPECIFICATIONS
Standard
Chassis.
11/2
ton truck w:th heavy duty springs and shocks
Tires.
6:25-20, 10 ply. Dual rear wheels
Outside Dimensions:
23' 9"
7' 11l/2"
10' 6"
Length
Width
Height
_
_
Inside Dimensions:
Length (back of driver seat)
16'
Width
Height
7' 6"
6' 9"
Outside Finish
Rear curb -side compartment of TJ -72 houses power cable reel,
audio/
video entrance panel, and power panel with weatherproof flap.
cal voltage regulator is also supplied. The power distribution panel is conveniently located in the operating section.
The body allows more than 51/2 feet of extra space at the
rear for carrying cameras for a small remote pick -up or
on -spot recording of a commercial. The TR -22 equipment is
securely and safely mounted. Screw clamps are used to
specification
To customer
Total Weight (with equipment)
Approx. 14,000 lbs.
Body..
_.
Custom built with 3 underside storage compartments, dual
short racks with formica work surface, and tape storage cabinet
_
Equipment Supplied
1
Mobile Tape Unit. Includes: 2 -Air Conditioners, 18,000 BTU
per air output; 1- Stabline Voltage Regulator, 6 KVA; -Power Isolation Transformer, 7.5 KVA;
-Power Control Panel with a -c
meter;
-Power Cable, 75 foot; -A -c Power and conduit installed; 3 -cable reels, manual;
-Fire extinguisher;
-Set
of wiring, cables, and connectors installed; and 1- Entrance connection panel for Audio, Video, Control, and Power Cables.
TJ -72A
1
1
1
1
1
1
An RCA custom bus design illustrating maximum utilization of all available space for equipment storage.
104
61.3300
MOBILE UNITS
The 35 -foot TJ -82 Mobile Bus showing RCA's exclusive
TJ -82
front -end design and svelt styling which permits distinctive station channel trim.
Camera Bus
The 35 -foot TJ -82 Mobile Bus is an ideal unit for transport-
ing a complete monochrome camera production system.
It can also be used for color TV field operation. This unit
consists essentially of a standard commercially available
bus chassis which is modified for tandem rear axles upon
which is constructed a custom body, attractively styled and
well engineered for practical application of remote television pickups. This Mobile Unit serves as a studio always
ready to move when needed and ready for operation in
a minimum of time. Space is provided for all essential
equipment needed for the pickup of a remote television
program. Such equipment includes cameras, synchronizing
generator, switching facilities, power supplies, and a means
for relaying the picture and sound information back to
the station.
Those items normally operated from the control room of
the unit, such as the camera controls, are transported in
their operating position. Other items such as cameras,
tripods, dollies, cable reels, and microwave transmitter
have storage space alloted inside the vehicle for transportation.
The interior of the bus is divided
in distinct operating
areas, with ample space for the driver, audio and tape
center, switching operator, and monitoring and control
position. The rear of the mobile unit is given over to rack
equipment, and the storage closets and cubicles.
The typical TJ -82 bus has a body 35 feet long overall,
about
8 feet wide and not to exceed 121/2 feet high to
meet legal requirements in all states. The body inside is
about 291/2 feet back of driver and 71/2 feet wide by 7 feet
21/2- inches high. Double doors at the rear provide access
to air coolers and generators. The unit has perforated steel
walls and ceiling, and 2 -inch insulation with aluminum foil
moisture barrier. It is completely air conditioned.
The custom body is susceptible to numerous design changes
to meet custom installation requirements. Doors can be
single or double type, steps portable or retractible, a wide
choice of floorings, custom duct work throughout, custom
lighting, trim, reinforced roof platform, special window
and windshield glass, paint body of exterior and interior
and trim to suit station preference, with many other minor
details designed to provide the utmost in efficiency, safety
and reliability.
MOBILE UNITS
Artist's conception of typical 35-foot bus for
monochrome camera production system including front to rear: Custom audio desk, custom
switching desk, video position for four field
camera controls, custom monitor frame
and two equipment rack assemblies.
SPECIFICATIONS
Distinctive RCA air bag suspension system which provides air -smooth
riding, automatic leveling and longer equipment life. Bellows shown
are optional with any RCA :ustom mobile truck, bus, or trailer.
Standard Bus modified for tandem rear axles
with air suspension, heavy duty front shocks, power steering, air
brakes, and dual 30 gal. gasoline tank
10:00 x 20, on 7.50 V Rims
Tires
Chassis
Outside Dimensions:
Length
Width
Height
Inside Dimensions:
Length (behind driver)
Width
Height
Outside Finish
35'
7' 111/2"
12'
6"
29' 6"
7' 6"
7' 21/2"
To customer specifications
Custom built w ih built -in power supply frame,
Body
video control equipment frame, storage compartments at rear,
production and audio decks, windows to customer specifications,
roof deck, and complete underside storage space.
Equipment Supplied
1
Mobile Camera Unit to include: 2-Air conditioners, 3 tons
each, with ceiling duct system; -Power Isolation Transformer, 25
KVA; 1- Stabiline Voltage Regulator, 27.5 KVA; -Power Control
Panel; 5 -Cable reels; -Motor Generator, 40 KVA, installed in
rear of bus; 1- Clock; 2 -Fire Extinguishers; -Set of Equipment
Slides; -A -c Power cable and conjuit installed; -Set of wiring,
cables and connectors installed; 1- Entrance connection panel for
Audio, Video, and Power Cables; end -Power Cable, 100 feet.
TJ -82A
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MOBILE UNITS
Color Mobile Trailer, RCA Type Ti -92, also affirms distinctive RCA streamlined styling.
TJ -92
Color Mobile Trailer
The RCA Color Mobile Trailer is expressly designed to
accommodate up to four complete color camera chains
all necessary audio and video equipments required to originate a television remote pickup in color.
as well as
A trailer offers many advantages over bus or truck. Most
significant is the fact that a trailer provides 5 to 8 feet
more inside length for the same overall length. RCA trailers
provide about 60 percent more cubic storage space than
a truck or bus with a forward mounted engine, and 80
percent more than a bus with a pancake engine underneath. Furthermore, a tractor to pull the trailer to a new
site can be rented instead of made a part of the capital
investment. If a tractor is provided, it becomes an ideal
place to mount the motor generator, since it can then be
driven a distance away from the trailer to reduce noise.
In common with other RCA
mobile units, the studio trailer
designed from the chassis uo specifically for color television mobile use. The trailer consists of a standard 35 -foot
chassis with custom body built to be structurally sound and
equipped for TV production requirements. The diamond
steel roof is reinforced to permit its use as a camera
mounting platform when on location. The outside walls
are smooth, there are no wheel boxes, and the front is
square with rounded corners. Typical facilities include king
pin trailer hitch, air brakes, wire trench under floor, ceiling tie oars for equipment support, heavy -duty linoleum
is
floor covering, insulated walls and ceiling, installed interior
lighting system, special access doors, curb -side door ladder, built -in power controls, and compartmentalized construction to house each unit of TV equipment.
Four -wheel trailer to house motor generator is practical answer to
portable power source. Trailer can be driven a distance away from
the mobile unit to reduce noise.
MOBILE UNITS
5.
Program Director
10. Racks of Distribution Equipment
7.
and Processing Amplifiers
6.
...
Monitor Speakers
12. Power Control
Panel
Switching and Special Effects
9
4. Waveform Scopes
Audio and Test Racks
11. Transistor Switching
Equipment
8. Audio Control ..
13. Air-conditioning
Equipment
3. Color Monitors
2. Monochrome Monitors
14. Storage for Camera
Mounting Equipment
Video Operating Position
1.
15. Storage for Color TV Cameras
Artist's sketch of
Mobile Trailer Unit to house live camera and production studio.
TJ -92
air conditioned by means
Three heavy -duty
KW
heating.
of 17 tons cooling and 9
15 KVA Power transformers and three automatically controlled motor driven stabiline voltage regulators are provided. Recessed, covered power connectors are provided
for connection of the trailer to commercial power sources.
The Mobile Trailer is completely
Summary
Engineering experience can be applied to your
mobile problem and a design tailored to fit your needs.
Our engineers and functional designers will work closely
with your staff to develope maximum utility and practical
layout with a minimum investment.
Optional features available in truck, bus or trailer are:
RCA's
SPECIFICATIONS
Custom semi -trailer chassis with tandem axle,
air suspended, 35 -foot with two speed, individually controlled
landing gear.
Chassis
10:00
Tires
x
35'
7' 111/2"
Width
Height
12' 6"
Inside Dimensions:
Length
34'
7' 6"
Width
Height
Outside Finish.
7'
2"
To customer specifications
_
Custom built with roof platform,
Body
winch, built -in audio desk and switching desk, and complete underside storage compartments.
Equipment Supplied
1
Advantages
Expansible Sides
Permit sides to open out to enlarge operating and
maintenance area when at standstill.
Air Suspension
50 percent better ride. Automatic
vided.
Motor Generator
Built in or in trailer type (See trailer photo).
Air Conditioning
Complete cooling, heating and humidity control.
20
Outside Dimensions:
Length
Features
When asking for information refer to following designations:
TJ -70
1
1
Series Trucks (Front doors to rear of
TJ -71
TJ -72
TJ -73
TJ -80
Mobile Color Camera Trailer to include: -Air Conditioner
-Air Duct System;
with 17 tons cooling and 9 KW heating;
3 -Power Isolation Transformer, 15 KVA; 3- Stabiline Voltage
Regulator, 12 KVA; -Power Control Panel with meters; 2 -Fire
Extinguishers; -Set of Slides for Regulators; 4- Storage Dollies
for cameras; -A -c Power Cables and conduit installed; 1 -Set
-Power Entrance
of wiring, cables, and connectors installed;
TJ -92A
front wheels)
ft. Usable space behind driver seat
16 ft. Usable space behind driver seat
20 ft. Usable space behind driver seat
10
Series Buses (Front door forward of front wheels)
TJ-81
30 ft. Overall Length
TJ-82
35 ft. Overall Length
TJ-83
40 ft. Overall Length
1
1
TJ -90
Series Trailer (Requires Tractor for motive power)
1
1
Panel; 1 -Audio Entrance Panel;
Cables, 100' each; and Lettering
1
-Video
Entrance Panel; 2 -Power
to customer specifications.
leveling pro-
TJ -91
30 ft. Overall length less tractor
TJ -92
35 ft. Overall length less tractor
TJ -93
40 ft. Overall length less tractor
INDEX
INDEX
Page
3-14
3-14
3-14
3.14
Type Number
TK-60A
TK-60A
TK-60A
TK-60A
5
5
8
7295 -B
10
10
I1
I I
11
11
11
11
WP-16B
WP-16B
12
12
12
12
12
14
14
TM -35
TM -35
TM-6C
TM-6C
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
5ABP1
14
1OSP4
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
4' 2 -INCH IMAGE ORTHICON CAMERAS
Description
4% -Inch Image Orthicon T\ Studio Camera Chain,
MI Number
volts, 60
41/2-Inch Image Orthicon TV Studio Camera Chain, 230 volts, 50
4% -Inch Image Orthicon TV Field Camera Chain, 115 volts, 60
41/2-Inch Image Orthicon TV Field Camera Chain, 230 volts, 50
(For complete list of equipment supplied see Page 14)
Camera and Viewfinder for TK-60A Camera, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Camera and Viewfinder for TK-60A Camera, 230 volts, 50 cycles
4% -Inch Image Orthicon Camera Tube
Remote Control Panel, Console Mounting
Remote Control Panel, TM -35 Mounting
Processor, Rack Mounting, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Processor, Rack Mounting, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Field Processor, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Field Processor, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Power Supply, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Power Supply, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Field Case for WP -16B, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Field Case for WP-16B, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Wedge Mount
Portable Master Monitor, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Portable Master Monitor, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Master Monitor, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Master Monitor, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Blower for TM-6C, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Blower for TM -6C, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Centering Current Subchassis
Unregulated High Voltage Subchassis
Viewfinder Hood
Console Housing, 13 -Inch
CRO Tube
Kinescope, 8-Inch
Console Well Adaptor for MI -26008 Remote Control Panel
Rack Adaptor for Mí.26008 Remote Control Panel
Left Panel Assembly and Side Cover for Console Housing
Right Panel Assembly and Side Cover for Console Housing
Upper Left Side Cover Only
Upper Right Side Cover Only
Spare Video Preamplifier for TK-60A
Spare Remote Iris Drive \- -embly for TK-60A
Spare LO. Yoke Assembly tin- TK -60 k
115
cycles
cycles
cycles
cycles
26002-A
556002 -A
26877-A
26008
26007
26003-A
556003-A
26009 -A
556009-A
26084 -B
26094 -B
26216
N26216
26884 -A
26154
556154
26136 -C
N26136 -C
26579 -B
556579-B
26083 -A
26082 -A
26373
26786
26667
26655
26252
26254
26788-1
26788-2
26789-1
26789.2
26006
26019
26004
COLOR CAMERA CHAINS
15-26
14.26
TK-41C
TK-41C
23
23
26
26
26
TM -21D
26
26
26
26
26
26
WA -1E
WA-9A
WA -7C
Color Camera Chain n ith Console Mounted Controls
Color Camera Chain with Rack Mounted Controls
(For complete list of equipment supplied see Page 26)
Video Level Control Panel
Table Assembly for MI.40871 (Rack Mounted)
Gamma Corrector (0.7)
Gamma Corrector (1.0)
Color Control Monitor
Field Lens Test Pattern
Spare Video Preamplifier for TK41C
Pulse Delay Line
Color Bar Generator
Calibration Pulse Generator
Linearity Checker
40871
40872
40833-1
40833-2
40226 -D
40873
40800 -A
26886
34001 -F
26070
34017 -B
INDEX
ORTHICON CAMERA CHAINS
TypeAAumiter
Description
Studio Camera Equipment, 115 volts, 60 cycle.
TK-14
Studio Camera Equipment, 230 volts, 50 cycles
TK -14
Field Camera Equipment, 115 volts, 60 cycles
TK -14
Field Camera Equipment, 230 volts, 50 cycles
TK -14
(For complete list of equipment supplied see Page
3 -Inch Image Orthicon Camera, 115 volts, 60 cycles
3 -Inch Image Orthicon Camera, 230 volts, 50 cycles
5820 -A
Image Orthicon
Cathode Ray Tube for Field Camera
3KP1
3 -INCH IMAGE
Page
27.34
27.34
27.34
27 -34
28
28
28
28
31
31
31
7TP4
31
31
31
31
32
32
33
33
33
34
34
TY -31
TY -31
35-38
TK -15B
35 -38
TK -15B
35-38
TK -15B
35 -38
TK -15B
36
36
38
38
38
38
TK -15B
TK -15B
38
38
38
38
38
38
7735 -A
39-40
39-40
39-40
39-40
TK -1C
TK -1C
3940
39-40
41-44
42
42
42
43
43
110
2F21
1699
380 -D
580 -D
MI Number
341
Camera Viewfinder, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Camera Viewfinder, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Kinescope Tube for Field Camera
Studio Camera Control Chassis, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Studio Camera Control Chassis, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Focus Current Regulated Supply, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Focus Current Regulated Supply, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Field Camera Control, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Field Camera Control, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Field Power Supply, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Field Power Supply, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Auxiliary Field Case
Spare Video Preamplifier
Spare Yoke Assembly
26014
556014
26656 -A
26650
26024
556024
26666
26074
556074
26093
556093
26064
556064
26091
N26091
26294
26153
26747-B
VIDICON CAMERA CHAINS
Studio Vidicon TV Camera with TM -6C Master Monitor,
115 volts, 60 cycles
Studio Vidicon TV Camera with TM -6C Master Monitor,
230 volts, 50 cycles
Field Vidicon Camera Chain with TM.35 Master Monitor,
115 volts, 60 cycles
Field Vidicon Camera Chain with TM.35 Master Monitor,
230 volts, 50 cycles
(For complete list of equipment supplied see Page 38)
Vidicon Camera, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Vidicon Camera, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Output Amplifier, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Output Amplifier, 230 volts, 50 cycles
Remote Control Panel, Console Mounting
Console Well Adaptor for MI- 26213 -A
Remote Control Panel (TM-35 Mounting)
Viewfinder Shade
Vidicon Tube
Adjustable Viewfinder Hood
Automatic Sensitivity Control Chassis, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Automatic Sensitivity Control Chassis, 230 volts, 50 cycles
26023 -C
P26023 -C
26063 -A
P26063 -A
26213 -A
26212
26161 -A
26842
36323-A
26843
26191 -A
N26191 -A
MONOSCOPE CAMERA
Monoscope Camera
-- Muuuncope Tube), 115 volts, 60 cycles
Monoscope Camera Lea Monoscope Tube), 230 volts, 50 cycles
Monoscope Tube
Special Monoscope Tube
Power Supply, 115 volts, 60 cycles
Power Supply, 230 volts, 50 cycles
i
I
,
(
CAMERA LENSES
Ortal Fixed Focus Lenses (For 41/2-inch Image Orthicon Cameras)
L38 -Inch Ortal Lens
2 -Inch Ortal Lens
3 -Inch Ortal Lens
5 -Inch Ortal Lens
8-Inch Ortal Lens
26030 -B
P26030 -B
26657
On Request
21523 -C
P21523 -C
26882-2
26882 -3
26882-4
26882-5
26882-6
CAMERA LENSES (Continued)
Page
47
47
17
48
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
50.51
51
51
51
51
51
51
52-53
53
53
53
55-56
55-56
55-56
55-56
55-56
55-56
55 -56
55-56
57-58
58
59
59
59
26882.7
26882.8
26882-9
Lens, 13mm, f /1.5
Lens, 25mm, f11.5
Lens, 50mm, f/1.5
Lens, 75mm, f/1.9
Lens, 102mm, f/2.7
Varotal Lenses
Outdoor Lens
Studio Lens
Range Extender 1 for Varotal N'
Range Extender 2 for Varotal V
Close -up Adaptor for Varotal III
Close -up Adaptor for Varotal V
Field Lens for TK-41 Camera
Vidicon Studio Zoom Lens (For TK -15 TV Cameras)
Angenieux Zoomar Lens
Range Converter 56 to 560mm for 10.2.1B
Hyper Universal Zoomar Lens with Close -up Adaptor
Range Converters for Hyper Universal 4 to 25 inches
4 to 25 Inches f/5.6
61/2 to 40 Inches f /8A
111/2 to 70 Inches f /20
36316-13
36316.25
36316.50
36316-75
36316.102
16 -Inch
46.49
L-20
10.2.1B
826159
826160
826161
826162
26550-9
26550-1
26550-2
26550 -3
26550-4
26590.14
2659045
26550 -8
40802-Al
40802 -A2
40802 -A3
40802 -A4
40802 -A5
40802 -A6
40802 -A7
3631642
Varotal Ill
Varotal V
40802 -A3
Interchangeable Adaptor
TD -3A
TD -9AC
TD -9AC
TD -9AM
CAMERA MOUNTING EQUIPMENT
26036
Counterbalanced Camera Pedestal
26391
Counterweights for TD -3A (Required for 7I. -60 Cameras)
-A
40861
cycles
volts,
60
115
TV
Cameras),
Color
Pedestal
(For
Motor Driven
Motor Driven Pedestal (For Color TV Cameras), 230 volts, 50 cycles N40861 -A
Motor Driven Pedestal (For Monochrome TV Cameras),
volts, 60 cycles
Motor Driven Pedestal (For Monochrome TV Cameras),
230 volts, 50 cycles
115
59
MI Number
Ortal Lens
Ortal Lens
22 -Inch Ortal Lens
Fixed Focus Lenses (For 3 -Inch Image Orthicon Cameras)
35mm Fixed Focus Lens
50mm Fixed Focus Lens
85mm Fixed Focus Lens
135mm Fixed Focus Lens
Standard and Telephoto Lenses (For 3 -Inch Image Orthicon Cameras)
35mm Studio Camera Lens
50mm Studio Camera Lens
90mm Studio Camera Lens
135mm Studio Camera Lens
81/2-Inch Studio and Field Camera Lens
13 -Inch Field Camera Lens
17 -Inch Field Camera Lens
25 -Inch Field Camera Lens
Field Lenses for Color Studio Cameras
Color Field Lens, 20.0 Diopter, for 50mm
Color Field Lens, 13.5 Diopter, for 90 & 135mm
Color Field Lens, 7.0 Diopter, for 81/2 -Inch
Color Field Lens, 5.75 Diopter, for 13 -Inch, 15 -Inch, 17 -Inch,
Berthiot B4 & Studio Zoomar
Color Field Lens, 4.5 Diopter, for 25 -Inch
Color Field Lens, 16.5 Diopter, for 75mm
Color Field Lens, 24.7 Diopter, for 35mm
Vidicon Camera Lenses
Lens, 12mm, f/1.2
121/2 -Inch
43
44
44
45
45
45
45
45
53
53
53
53
54
Description
Type Number
TD -9AM
26038 -A
N26038 -A
INDEX
CAMERA MOUNTING EQUIPMENT (Continued)
Page
59
59
60
60
61
62
62
62
62
63
64
65 -66
65-66
65-66
67 -68
67 -68
69
69
69
Type Number
TD -7A0
TD -7AV
TD -10
PN6-29
PN6-29B
PN6-33B
PN -100
TD -11A
TD -15A
TDC-20
TDC-10
TDC-30
69
69
69
70.71
70-71
70-71
70-71
72
73
73
74-75
74
74
74-75
75
75
75
76
77-80
77 -80
77 -80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77-80
77.80
Ile., riptiun
Diameter Steering Wheel (Supplied with TD -9AC)
25 -Inch Diameter Steering Wheel ( Supplied with TD -9AM I
Lightweight Camera Pedestal (For TK -14, TK-60 Cameras)
Lightweight Camera Pedestal( For TK -15 Cameras)
Hydraulic Camera Pedestal
Standard Pneumatic- Balance Pedestal
Pneumatic Pedestal with Brake
Pneumatic Color Pedestal with Brake
Air Compressor
Metal Tripod
Tripod Dolly
Vidicon Camera Mounting Tripod
34 -Inch
Dolly
Balanced Pan and Tilt Head
TV Camera Cradle Head (Monochrome)
TV Camera Cradle Head (Color)
Shock Mounts (For Field Television Equipment I
For TK -14 Field Camera
For TK -14 Field Camera Control, TY-31 Field Power Supply and
TG-12 Sync Generator
For TM -35 Portable Master Monitor
For WP -16 Portable Power Supply in Field Case
For TK -60 Field Proce«nr
MI Number
40862
26039
26044 -A
26054
26053
26046
26042-A
26201
26200
26202
26203 -A
40824
26511 -3
26511-Al
26511 -A3
26511 -A5
26511 -A6
CAMERA ACCESSORIES
Electro- Magnetic Orbiter Coil for Th -11/31 Series Monochrome Cameras 26850 -A
Electro- Magnetic Orbiter Coil for TK -10/30 Series Monochrome Cameras 26851 -A
Electro- Magnetic Orbiter Generator
26853
Modification Kit for Camera Controls
26857
Neutral Density Filter Slide Mechanism
(For Type TK- 40A/41 Color Cameras)
40528
Neutral Density Filter Holders
(For TK-11/31 and TK -14 Series Cameras)
26847
Plate Current Meter
21200 -C1
Television Test Charts
EIA Linearity Chart
26822.1
EIA Resolution Chart
26822 -2
EIA Registration Chart
26822 -3
RCA Burst Chart
IB -31605
EIA Linear Reflectance Chart
26822-4
EIA Logarithmic Reflectance Chart
26822-5
Model 251 Television Diascope
Interphone Equipment
Transistor Interphone Connection
11784
Interphone Connection
11734
Retardation Coil
11737
Shelf for Mounting 11734
11735
Panel (Accommodating 14 Retardation Coils)
11736 -A
Single Headband Assembly
11743
Double Headband Assembly
11744
Regulated Power Supply, 3 amps 110 volts, a -c
11316
Regulated Power Supply, 6 amps., 110 volts, a -c
11318
Regulated Power Supply, 6 amps., 220 volts, a -c
591318
Transistor Amplifiee
11757
81-84
CAMERA CABLES, PLUGS AND CONNECTORS
TV Cables, Plugs, Connectors -See Price List to Terminal Catalog
85-96
TELEVISION LIGHTING EQUIPMENT
Television Lighting Equipment
97.108
100-102
TJ -70
103.104
105-106
107-108
TI-72
TJ-82
TJ -92
CUSTOM MOBILE EQUIPMENT
Custom TV Mobile Units
Mobile Truck
Television Tape Truck
Camera Bus
Color Mobile Trailer
s
F.
'!i!t"."4!r`'ß,.
a
.daa...
a..f
Atlanta, Ga.
1121
Phone 524-7703
Rhodes -Haverty Bldg., 30303
Austin, Tex.
Glendale 3 -8233
4605 Laurel Canyon Drive, 78703
Burbank, Calif.
Phone 849 -6741
2700 Olive Street, 91505
Camden, N. J.
Woodlawn
3 -8000
Front & Cooper Streets, 08102
Charlotte, N. C.
Phone 333 -3996
504 Charlottetown Mall, 28204
Chicago, Ill.
Phone 467 -5900
2000 Merchandise Mart Plaza, 60654
Cleveland, Ohio
Cherry
1600 Keith Bldg., 44115
Dallas, Texas
Melrose
1
1
-3450
-3050
7901 Carpenter Freeway, 75210
Dedham, (Boston) Mass.
Davis 6 -8850
886 Washington Street, 02026
Indianapolis, Ind.
RCA BROADCAST
SALES OFFICJS
501
Melrose 6 -5321
N. LaSalle Street, 46201
Kansas City, Mo.
Emerson 3 -6770
7711 State Line Road, 66114
Memphis, Tenn. Fairfax 4 -4434
3189 Summer Avenue, 38112
New York, N. Y.
MU 9 -7200
36 W. 49th Street, 10020
Portland, Ore.
Belmont 4 -7297
1841 N.E. Couch Street, 97212
San Francisco, Calif.
420 Taylor Street, 94102
Ordway
3 -8027
Seattle, Wash.
Main 2 -8350
2246 First Avenue, S., 98104
Southfield, (Detroit) Mich.
Phone 357 -0080
Southfield Office Plaza, Room A3 -300, 48075
Washington, D.C.
1725
Federal 7 -8500
Street, N.W., 20006
K
West Palm Beach, Fla.
Phone 683 -2219
645 5. Military Trail, 33401
RCA International Division
Phone 689 -7200
30 Rockefeller Plaza
New York, New York
RADIO CORPORATION OF AMERICA
10020
,01,41.4.0
4 s
BROADCAST AND COMMUNICATIONS PRODUCTS DIVISION, CAMDEN 2, N.J.
T
TV 101463
MC MARIO
5!
®
RCA
REGISTERED
INTERNATIONAL DIVISION, 30 ROCKEFELLER
MARCA(S
REGISrRRDR
S
PLAZA, NEW YORK 20, N.Y., U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement